JP2017209248A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of favorably suppressing monotomization of a game.SOLUTION: A game area PE includes actuation ball entry parts 62 and 63. When a game ball enters an actuation ball entry part 62 or 63, a game machine acquires reservation information on the basis of the ball entry, and executes a win/failure lottery of a jackpot or the like each time a ball enters the actuation ball entry part. RAM includes a first area to an eighth area for individually storing acquired reservation information. The game machine is configured to store the acquired reservation information in time series order until reaching an upper limit storage number, and sequentially executes the win/failure lottery of the stored reservation information. When newly-acquired reservation information is stored in the first area, the game machine raises an occurrence possibility of a reservation forenotice performance as a performance to be executed before a game round relating to the reservation information is started, compared with a case where the reservation information is consumed and a latest reservation information is transferred from the second area to the first area.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 4

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by the player. When the game ball launched from the game ball launching unit enters the entrance part provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1). ).

JP 2002-78904 A

  In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to suppress the monotonization of the game and suppress the decrease in the player's willingness to play.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably suppress monotonization of games.

  Hereinafter, means for solving the above problems will be described.

The invention described in claim 1
A starting pitching section provided in the game area;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the entrance to the starting entrance part;
Acquisition information storage means capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information;
Gaming state transition means for transitioning the gaming state to the special gaming state when the determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information;
Information corresponding to the determination result in a case where the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage unit is a determination target by the determination unit, the information before the predetermined special information is the target of the determination A destination identification means to identify in timing;
The special notification based on the information specified by the destination specifying means is performed at a specific game time before the game times related to the special information specified by the destination specifying means, or the specific game times and the specific game times. Special notification means to be performed in the previous game times before,
The acquired information storage means has a plurality of storage areas for individually storing the special information,
Shift means for sequentially shifting the special information stored in the storage area in the plurality of storage areas;
Based on the fact that the newly acquired special information is stored in any of the plurality of storage areas, it is determined whether or not to perform the special notification for the special information, and the special information already stored is the shift means Special notification determining means for determining whether to perform the special notification on the special information shifted based on being shifted by
The special notification determining means is configured such that the special information that is already stored is shifted by the shift means and the special information that has been newly acquired is stored in a predetermined storage area of the plurality of storage areas. When moving to a predetermined storage area, it is configured to determine whether or not to perform special notification so that the special notification is easily performed.

  The monotonization of the game can be suitably suppressed.

It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success or failure lottery. It is the schematic which shows a success / failure table. It is the schematic which shows a distribution table. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for through. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for a working opening. It is a flowchart which shows an information acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows game times control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows a game state transfer process. (A) It is a flowchart which shows a preparation mode transfer process, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the process for preparation modes. It is a flowchart which shows an opening / closing execution mode transfer process. (A) Flowchart showing a state notification preparation process executed by the MPU of the notification / production control device, (b) Schematic showing a relationship between jackpot type and winning order notification. (A) Schematic which shows the instruction | indication aspect in preparation mode, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the process for a setting of a state alerting | reporting aspect. It is the schematic which shows the timing of the state alerting | reporting according to various conditions. It is the schematic which shows the modification of the structure which concerns on a status alert | report. (A) The flowchart which shows the preparation process for state alerting | reporting in 2nd Embodiment, (b) It is the schematic which shows the round used as the setting object of winning order. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a state alerting | reporting aspect. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of a game. It is a flowchart which shows the preparation process for the status alert | report in 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic which shows the various tables in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the stop result setting process for fall. It is a flowchart which shows the preparation process for state alerting | reporting. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for state alerting | reporting. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of a game. It is the schematic which shows the relationship between the number of electric power reservation in 5th Embodiment, and the setting number of the winning order corresponding to a status alert | report. It is a flowchart which shows the process for preparation modes in 6th Embodiment. (A) Schematic showing the relationship between the jackpot type and the set number of winning orders corresponding to status notifications, (b) Schematic showing the game flow. It is a flowchart which shows the process for preparation modes in 7th Embodiment. (A) Schematic which shows the flow of a game, (b) It is the schematic which shows the modification of the relationship between jackpot classification and prescribed number. (A) The flowchart which shows the process for preparation modes in 8th Embodiment, (b) It is the schematic which shows the relationship between a launch destination and a benefit. (A) Schematic showing the relationship between the winning type and winning order notification type in the ninth embodiment, (b) Schematic showing the relationship between the winning type and winning order notification probability, (c) It is the schematic which shows the relationship between the game state and launch period in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the information acquisition process in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation process for a hold notice. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a pending | holding command. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for holding | maintenance announcement effects performed by MPU of an alerting | reporting / production control apparatus. It is the schematic which shows the kind of holding notice effect. It is the schematic which shows the aspect of a reservation notice effect. (A) The flowchart which shows a lottery process at the time of holding command reception, (b) It is the schematic which shows the relationship between the addition destination of holding information, and probability correction | amendment. (A) The flowchart which shows the lottery process at the time of the command reception at the time of shift, (b) It is the schematic which shows the relationship between the storage area of pending information and probability correction.

<First Embodiment> Status notification according to winning order in the preparation mode Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), which is a kind of gaming machine, is based on the drawings. Will be described in detail. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 viewed from the front side, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in an exploded manner. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area PE of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main part 12 attached to the outer frame 11.

  The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting plate members to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. By attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall. In the pachinko machine 10, the outer frame 11 is not an essential configuration, and the outer frame 11 may be provided on the island facility of the game arcade.

  The gaming machine main part 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be opened and closed. Specifically, the upper support bracket 17 is fixed to a connection portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11, and further, a lower portion is connected to the connection portion between the lower frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11. Side support fittings 18 are provided. The upper support bracket 17 and the lower support bracket 18 form a support mechanism. The support mechanism causes the gaming machine main unit 12 to turn the left side of the pachinko machine 10 in the front view with respect to the outer frame 11. The right side can be turned to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with the turning tip side (see FIGS. 2 and 3).

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main part 12 includes an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack arranged behind the inner frame 13. Unit 15. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main part 12 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in front view.

  A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13 and can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated rearward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view ( (See FIG. 3).

(Front door frame 14)
Next, the front door frame 14 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a synthetic resin frame body 20 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11, and covers almost the entire front surface of the inner frame 13. Yes. A substantially elliptical window portion 21 is formed in the central portion of the frame body 20 so that a substantially entire game area PE described later can be viewed from the front. The window portion 21 is formed by the glass unit 22. The front door frame 14 is closed from the back side.

  The glass unit 22 includes a plurality of glass panels 23 having transparency and a glass holder that holds the glass panels 23. The glass holder is formed with a partition portion for partitioning the holding region of the glass panel 23 in the front-rear direction, and the two glass panels 23 face each other in the front-rear direction with the partition portion interposed therebetween. That is, by securing a predetermined gap between the glass panels 23, the gaming area PE is covered by the glass panels 23 from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 while avoiding interference between the glass panels 23. It is in a state.

  Note that it is not always necessary to unitize both glass panels 23 using a glass holder, and each glass panel 23 may be individually attached to the frame 20. Furthermore, the number of glass panels is arbitrary, and may be one or three or more. However, from the viewpoint of improving safety and security, it is preferable to employ a plurality of glass panels and to make the glass panels face each other across a predetermined gap. Incidentally, it is also possible to employ a synthetic resin panel member having transparency instead of the glass panel.

  As shown in FIG. 1, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the glass unit 22 (specifically, the window portion 21). For example, an annular illumination part 26 incorporating a light emitting means such as an LED is provided along the periphery of the window part 21. In the annular illumination part 26, lighting or blinking is performed according to a change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or at a predetermined reach. In addition, an error display lamp unit 27 that is turned on at the time of a predetermined error is provided in the center of the annular illumination unit 26 and at the uppermost part of the pachinko machine 10, and a prize that is turned on while the prize ball is being paid out on the left and right sides. A sphere lamp portion 28 is provided. Further, a speaker unit 29 is provided at a position close to the left and right prize ball lamp units 28 to output sound effects corresponding to the gaming state.

  Below the window portion 21 in the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulging portion 31 and a lower bulging portion 32 that bulge toward the front side are arranged side by side. An upper pan 33 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 31, and a lower pan 34 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 32. The upper plate 33 has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism described later while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 34 has a function of storing game balls that become surplus in the upper tray 33.

  An operation button 35 that is operated by the player is disposed at a portion of the upper bulging portion 31 that is closer to the front than the upper plate 33. By operating the operation button 35, an operation-related effect (for example, a special effect linked to an accessory) is performed.

  A game ball launching handle 41 is provided on the right side of the lower bulging portion 32 so as to protrude toward the front side. By operating the game ball launch handle 41, a game ball is launched from a game ball launch mechanism described later.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a passage forming unit 45 is attached to the back surface of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 45 is formed of a synthetic resin, and has a front door side upper dish passage that leads to the upper dish 33 and a front door side lower dish path that leads to the lower dish 34. In the passage forming unit 45, a receiving port portion that protrudes rearward and is opened upward is formed at the upper corner of the passage forming unit 45, and the entrance portion of the front door side upper plate passage is formed by dividing the receiving port portion into left and right by a partition wall. The portion and the entrance portion of the front door side lower dish passage are partitioned. The game balls that have entered the front door side upper dish passage are guided to the upper dish 33, and the game balls that have entered the front door side lower dish path are guided to the lower dish 34.

  Projecting shafts are provided at the upper end and the lower end of the rotation base end side of the back surface of the front door frame 14. These projecting shafts constitute an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13. Further, as shown in FIG. 2, a plurality of bar brackets 49 extending rearward are arranged in parallel in the vertical direction on the rotating front end side of the back surface of the front door frame 14. These hooks 49 constitute a locking mechanism for the inner frame 13.

(Inner frame 13)
Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The inner frame 13 is mainly configured by a resin base 50 whose outer shape is substantially rectangular like the outer frame 11. The height dimension of the resin base 50 is set slightly smaller than the height dimension of the outer frame 11. The resin base 50 is arranged close to the upper frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a slight gap is formed between the lower frame portion of the outer frame 11 and the resin base 50. A curtain plate is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to close the gap. The curtain plate is disposed below the resin base 50 (specifically, the lower end portion thereof). When the inner frame 13 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the resin base 50 is placed on the curtain plate. .

  Support metal fittings 51 and 52 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the rotation base end side of the front surface of the resin base 50. Shaft holes are formed in the support fittings 51 and 52, and the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 by inserting the projection shaft of the front door frame 14 into the shaft holes. ing.

  Insertion holes for inserting the metal fittings 49 provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14 are provided on the rotation front end side of the front surface of the resin base 50. As shown in FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 10 has a configuration in which a locking device 55 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is hidden behind the inner frame 13. Therefore, the front door frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 13 so as not to be opened by the hook metal 49 being locked to the locking device 55 (specifically, the front door hook receiving member) through the insertion hole. The locking device 55 has an inner frame collar member 57 extending rearward of the inner frame 13. When these inner frame hook members 57 are hooked on the hook receiving member 19 of the outer frame 11, the gaming machine main part 12 is locked in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 11.

  A cylinder lock 58 for performing an unlocking operation of the locking device 55 is installed at the lower right corner of the resin base 50. The cylinder lock 58 is integrated with the locking device 55. When the key inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 58 is turned to the right, the lock of the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 is released, and the cylinder lock 58 is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 58. The locking device 55 is configured so that the locking of the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 is released when the key is turned counterclockwise.

  A substantially elliptical window hole 54 is formed at the center of the resin base 50, and the window hole 54 is closed from behind by a game board 60 attached to the resin base 50. The game board 60 includes a wooden plywood and a sheet material that covers a front plate surface of the plywood, and the front surface of the game board 60 is exposed to the front side of the resin base 50 through the window hole 54. In the exposed portion, that is, the front surface of the game board 60, a game area PE in which game balls flow down is formed.

  Note that the game board 60 is not limited to wooden, and may be made of synthetic resin. In addition, the game board 60 may be mounted on the resin base 50 from the front of the game.

  Hereinafter, the game board 60 (in particular, various configurations arranged in the game area PE) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 60.

(Game board 60)
The game board 60 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in its thickness direction (front-rear direction). Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 61, working ball entering portions 62 and 63, variable winning devices 64 and 65, a through gate 66, a variable display unit 67, and the like. When a ball is entered into the general winning opening 61, the actuating balls 62 and 63, and the variable winning devices 64 and 65, this is detected by a detection sensor disposed on the back side of the game board 60, and the detection result is Based on this, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is given to the player.

  In addition, an out port 68 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 60, and game balls that have not entered various winning holes etc. are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 68. Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening part, and after passing through the opening part, the game ball passes through the opening part as well as being discharged from the game area PE. A mode in which the game area PE is not discharged later is also included. In the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 68, the general game port 61, the actuated ball units 62 and 63, the variable game devices 64 and 65 and the through gate 66 are entered. Is also expressed as “winning”.

  Further, the game board 60 is provided with a large number of nails 69 in order to disperse and adjust the flow path of the game ball as appropriate, and various members (functions) such as a windmill are provided. By various configurations such as the nail 69 and the windmill, the flow path of the game ball is differentiated and adjusted so that a winning to the above-described general winning opening 61 or the like occurs with an appropriate probability.

  The variable display unit 67 is arranged in the center of the game board 60, and the operation entrance parts 62, 63 and the like are arranged around the variable display unit 67. The operation entrance parts 62 and 63 are arranged below the variable display unit 67 in the vertical direction. Hereinafter, for the sake of convenience, the upper working entrance part is referred to as “upper working entrance part 62”, and the lower operation entrance part is referred to as “lower operation entrance part 63”.

  In particular, the lower working entrance portion (lottery opportunity entrance portion) 63 is provided with an open / close type entrance assist device (entrance assisting means) or an electric accessory 71 as an opening / closing member (opening / closing means). The electric accessory 71 includes a pair of left and right movable pieces 71a and a solenoid-type electric accessory drive unit 71b that drives the movable piece 71a, and operates the movable piece 71a to operate the lower operation ball. An open state (supported state or auxiliary state) in which the entrance to the entrance portion (lower operation opening 63a) in the portion 63 is possible or easy, and a closed state in which the entrance ball is more difficult than the open state (non-support State or non-auxiliary state).

  In the game area PE, the through gates 66 are arranged in the area on the right side and the area on the left side of the variable display unit 67, respectively, and winning by lottery triggered by the passage of the game ball through the through gate 66. In such a case, the electric accessory 71 is in an open state for a preset time.

  The variable winning devices (special winning devices or special winning means) 64 and 65 are individually arranged below and to the right of the variable display unit 67. For the sake of convenience, the variable winning device arranged below the variable display unit 67 (specifically, below the operation pitching portions 62 and 63) will be referred to as a “lower variable winning device 64” and to the right of the variable display unit 67 (details). Is a variable winning device arranged below the lower operating ball-entry unit 63) is referred to as a “right variable winning device 65”.

  The lower variable winning device 64 includes a lower large winning port 64a leading to the back side of the game board 60, and an opening / closing mechanism as an opening / closing means for opening and closing the lower large winning port 64a. The opening / closing mechanism includes an opening / closing door 64b as an opening / closing member for the lower large prize winning opening 64a. The open / close door 64b is switched between an open state (assisting state or receiving state) in which a game ball can be entered or facilitated and a closed state (non-assisting state or non-accepting state) in which the entering ball is impossible or difficult. It is possible. The opening / closing door 64b is connected to a variable ball driving unit 64c (specifically a solenoid) provided on the back side of the game board 60, and the opening / closing door 64b is maintained in a closed state under normal conditions. In the lottery, when the winning / opening execution mode (opening / closing execution state) is won, the open state is switched.

  Similarly, the right variable prize winning device 65 is provided with a right big prize opening 65a leading to the back side of the game board 60 and an opening / closing mechanism as an opening / closing means for opening and closing the right big prize winning opening 65a. Yes. The opening / closing mechanism includes an opening / closing door 65b as an opening / closing member for the right large prize winning opening 65a. The open / close door 65b is switched between an open state (assisting state or receiving state) in which a game ball can be entered or facilitated and a closed state (non-assist state or non-accepting state) in which the entering ball is impossible or difficult. It is possible. Further, the opening / closing door 65b is connected to a variable ball driving unit 65c (specifically, a solenoid) provided on the back side of the game board 60, and the opening / closing door 65b is maintained in a closed state under normal conditions. In the lottery, when the winning / opening execution mode (opening / closing execution state) is won, the open state is switched.

  Here, the opening / closing execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a big win is won. As an opening mode of the variable winning devices 64 and 65 in the opening / closing execution mode, for example, a predetermined time (30 sec in the present embodiment) or a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment) of winning is defined as one round. The opening / closing door 64b or the opening / closing door 65b is set to be repeatedly opened with a plurality of rounds (16 rounds, 8 rounds, 4 rounds in the present embodiment) as the upper limit.

  In the open / close execution mode, the lower variable winning device 64 (lower large winning opening 64a) is a target for opening, and the right variable winning device 65 (right large winning port 65a) is a target for opening. And are set. These both opening modes are selected according to the type of jackpot described later.

  Here, a supplementary description will be given of the arrangement of the operation ball entering portions 62 and 63 and the variable winning devices 64 and 65.

  The variable display unit 67 is disposed in the center of the game board 60. With this variable display unit 67 (detailed later, a center frame 77), the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE bypasses the variable display unit 67 from the right side (hereinafter referred to as the right route), and from the left side. The route is roughly divided into a detour route (hereinafter referred to as a left route).

  When a game ball is launched toward the left area of the variable display unit 67 (left route), the game ball that has passed the side of the variable display unit 67 is below the variable display unit 67 in the game area PE. It is easy to be guided to a region to be a side, that is, a region where the upper working ball entering portion 62 and the lower working ball entering portion 63 are arranged. At this time, the game ball that has passed through both actuated ball entering portions 62 and 63 flows down to the lower variable winning device 64 and does not enter the lower large winning port 64a of the lower variable winning device 64. Is discharged out of the game area PE through the out port 68. On the other hand, the right variable winning device 65 is arranged at a position where the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the variable display unit 67 cannot reach. For this reason, it is avoided that the game ball launched toward the left region of the variable display unit 67 enters the right big winning opening 65a.

  In addition, when a game ball is fired toward the area (right route) on the right side of the variable display unit 67, the game ball that has passed through the side of the variable display unit 67 flows down toward the right variable winning device 65. To do. The right variable winning device 65 is formed with a guiding portion that guides the game ball toward the lower region of the variable display unit 67 in the game region PE (specifically, the lower operation ball entering portion 63). The game ball that has passed through the right large winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 will flow down toward the lower operating ball entering portion 63. Then, the game ball that has passed through the lower working ball entering portion 63 flows down toward the lower variable winning device 64. Here, the upper operating ball entering portion 62 is arranged at a position where the game ball launched toward the right region of the variable display unit 67 is unreachable. For this reason, the game ball is allowed to enter the variable prize-winning devices 64 and 65 and the lower operation entrance portion 63, but is prevented from entering the upper operation entrance portion 62.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the through gates 66 are arranged on both the left and right sides of the variable display unit 67, so that the game ball can be fired toward either the left or right side of the variable display unit 67. The support function by the electric accessory 71 of the lower operation ball entry portion 63 is ensured (even if the game is performed according to the game situation).

  Next, the variable display unit 67 will be described. The variable display unit 67 includes a symbol display device 75 that variably displays symbols triggered by winnings in the operation pitching portions 62 and 63, and a center frame 77 disposed so as to surround the symbol display device 75. . The center frame 77 protrudes forward of the gaming machine, and the passage of game balls in the front area of the symbol display device 75 is restricted by the center frame 77.

  The symbol display device 75 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content on the display screen 75a is controlled by a display control device described later. On the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, for example, symbols are displayed side by side in the top, middle, and bottom, and these symbols are variably displayed as they are scrolled in the horizontal direction. When a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on a preset active line, a special gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a jackpot) occurs, and the above-described opening / closing execution mode is entered.

  The operation entrance parts 62 and 63 are arranged at positions close to the variable display unit 67. Since a big win can be triggered by winning a prize at the working pitches 62 and 63, the player pays attention to whether or not the winning pitches 62 and 63 win and whether or not a big win will occur. It is considered that attention is paid to the symbol display device 75 for grasping. Providing the operation entrance parts 62 and 63 near the variable display unit 67 is a device for concentrating a portion that the player wants to pay attention to around the variable display unit 67.

  A main display unit 81 is disposed on the side of the operating ball entering portions 62 and 63 (below the right variable winning device 65). The main display unit 81 is disposed along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area PE, and protrudes forward from the front surface of the game board 60 to the pachinko machine 10. The front surface of the main display unit 81 is opposed to the glass unit 22 (specifically, the rear glass panel 23) that allows the game area PE to be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and further to the rear glass panel 23. The distance between them is narrower than that of one game ball. This prevents the game ball from falling in front of the front surface of the main display unit 81.

  In the main display unit 81, a main display portion D on which a predetermined pattern or the like is displayed is provided at a portion facing the glass unit 22. The main display unit D includes an upper working ball display unit DU for displaying a lottery result based on winning in the upper working ball unit 62 (upper working port 62a) and a lower working ball unit 63 (lower side). A display panel DL for a lower side actuated ball portion that displays a result of a lottery performed based on winning in the operating port 63a).

  In the display unit DU for the upper action ball entry unit, the display of the variation in the pattern is performed using the winning in the upper action ball entry unit 62 as a trigger, and based on the winning in the upper operation ball entry unit 62 as a result of stopping the fluctuation display The result of the internal lottery performed is clearly indicated. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the upper working ball entering unit 62 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the variable display is stopped on the upper working ball display unit DU. After a predetermined pattern is displayed as a stop result, the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode.

  In the lower action entry part display unit DL, a change display of a picture is performed with a winning in the lower action entry part 63 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the change display, the lower action entry part 63 is displayed. The result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning is clearly indicated. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the lower operating ball entering portion 63 is a winning result corresponding to the big hit or special win, the variable display is stopped on the lower operating ball entering portion display unit DL. After a predetermined pattern is displayed as a stop result, the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode according to the result.

  Here, on the basis of winning in any one of the activated ball entering parts 62, 63, the corresponding activated ball part display unit DL, DU starts the variable display, displays a predetermined stop result, and displays the above variable display. The time until is stopped (determined display) corresponds to one game time. However, the number of game times is not limited to the above-mentioned content. For example, a single display area is provided, and even if a winning is made to any of the operating ball entering parts 62 and 63, the single game area is only given. In the configuration in which the variable display is performed in one display area, the variable display is started in the single display area, and the variable display is stopped (determined display) in a state where a predetermined stop result is displayed. Is one game.

  The main display unit 81 of the main display unit 81 is provided with a through gate display unit DS for displaying a lottery result based on winning in the through gate 66 in addition to the display units DL and DU for both actuated ball entering units. ing. In the through gate display unit DS, the display of the variation of the picture is performed with the winning of the through gate 66 as a trigger, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 66 is displayed as a result of stopping the variation display. It is clearly shown. When the result of the internal lottery (support lottery) based on the winning to the through gate 66 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the power release state, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the through gate display section DS. Then, after the change display is stopped, it shifts to the electric utility open state. In the electric combination open state, the electric combination 71 provided in the lower operation entrance portion 63 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 66 is retained up to 4 times, but the number of suspension is displayed on the main display portion D of the main display unit 81. A holding number display section DH is provided.

  Each of these display parts DL, DU, DS, DH is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 22 of the front door frame 14, and the front of these various display parts DL, DU, DS, DH. Visibility is secured by avoiding the movement of the game ball.

  The configuration of the inner frame 13 will be described again with reference to FIG. 2. A game ball is directed toward the game area PE based on the operation of the game ball launch handle 41 below the mounting area of the game board 60 in the resin base 50. A game ball launching mechanism 110 is provided. The game ball launching mechanism 110 includes a solenoid 111 that launches a game ball placed at a predetermined launch standby position, a launch rail 112 that defines the launch direction of the game ball launched by the solenoid 111, and a game at the launch standby position. A ball feeding device 113 for supplying a ball and a base plate 114 on which the various configurations 111 to 113 are mounted are provided as main components, and the base plate 114 is fixed to the resin base 50 so that the resin base 50 is fixed. On the other hand, it is integrated.

  The firing rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in an inclined state so as to be inclined upward toward the game board 60 side. A ball stopper that holds the game ball supplied from the ball feeding device 113 at the above-described firing standby position is disposed at a position closer to the downstream end portion (that is, the lower end portion) of the firing rail 112. The solenoid 111 is arranged at a position further downstream than the ball stopper.

  The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power source / launch control device described later. Based on the output of the electrical signal from the power supply / launch control device, the output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the expansion / contraction direction, so that the game ball placed at the launch standby position is on the game board 60 side, more specifically, the game. It is launched toward the guide rail 100 mounted on the board 60.

  In the guide rail 100, the game area PE is partitioned so that the outer shape of the game area PE is substantially circular. In addition, the guide rail 100 includes an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 arranged so as to face each other with a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and a single guide passage 103 is defined by both the rails 101 and 102. Is formed. The guide passage 103 has an inlet portion that is open to the tip end side (obliquely downward) of the firing rail 112 and an outlet portion that is located above the game area PE. The game ball fired based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the game area PE by moving in the order of the firing rail 112 → guide rail 100 (entrance portion → exit portion). By adjusting the amount of operation of the game ball launch handle 41, the game ball can be divided into an area on the left side of the variable display unit 67 in the game area PE and an area on the right side of the variable display unit 67 in the game area PE. It is possible.

  In the game board 60, a reverse prevention member 106 for preventing the game ball reaching the game area PE from returning back into the guide passage 103 is attached to the front side of the exit portion, specifically near the tip of the inner rail 101. Thus, it is possible to prevent the subsequent launch of the game ball from being hindered by the game ball that has reached the game area PE first.

  The guide rail 100 (see FIG. 4) and the firing rail 112 are arranged such that the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the firing rail 112 face each other with the lower end edge of the game board 60 interposed therebetween. That is, both the rails 100 and 112 are arranged such that the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the firing rail 112 are shifted left and right in the vicinity of the lower end edge of the game board 60. Thus, a gap of a predetermined interval is formed between the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the firing rail 112 while bringing both rails 100 and 112 close to the lower end edge of the game board 60.

  A foul ball passage 46 is disposed below the gap formed in this way. The foul ball passage 46 is formed integrally with the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. If the game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 110 do not reach the game area PE and return to the inside of the guide passage 103 as foul balls, the foul balls enter the foul ball passage 46 through the gap. It becomes. The foul ball passage 46 communicates with the lower door passage on the front door side, and the game balls that have entered the foul ball passage 46 are discharged to the lower plate 34 shown in FIG. This suppresses interference between the foul ball and the next game ball to be launched.

  A through hole that penetrates the resin base 50 in the front-rear direction is formed on the left side of the firing base 112 in the resin base 50 (specifically, the side that supports the front door frame 14). A passage forming member is formed in the through hole. 121 is disposed. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the resin base 50 and has a main body side upper dish path and a main body side lower dish path. The upstream side of the main body side upper dish passage and the main body side lower dish passage communicates with a game ball distributing section described later. In addition, the receiving portion of the passage forming unit 45 attached to the front door frame 14 enters below the passage forming member 121, and the front door side upper plate passage is disposed below the main body side upper plate passage, A front door side upper dish passage is disposed below the main body side lower dish passage.

  An opening / closing member 124 that opens and closes the main body side upper dish path and the main body side lower dish path is attached to the resin base 50 below the passage forming member 121. The opening / closing member 124 is supported by a support shaft provided at the lower end thereof so as to be pivotable in the front-rear direction, and further includes an urging member that urges the main body side upper dish passage and the main body side lower dish path to a front position. Is provided. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13, the opening / closing member 124 rises as shown in the figure, and closes the main body side upper dish passage and the main body side lower dish path. Thereby, when the front door frame 14 is opened in a state where game balls are stored in the main body side upper dish passage or the main body side lower dish passage, it is possible to prevent such a problem that the stored balls spill out. On the other hand, in a state where the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening / closing member 124 is pushed open against the biasing force by the receiving portion provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. In this state, the main body side upper dish path and the front door side upper dish path communicate with each other, and the main body side lower dish path and the front door side lower dish path communicate with each other.

Next, the back configuration of the inner frame 13 (the resin base 50 and the game board 60) will be described with reference to FIG.
Bearing fittings 132 are arranged vertically on the rotation base end side of the back surface of the resin base 50. The bearing bracket 132 is formed with bearing portions spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by these bearing portions.

  A plurality of locking fittings 135 are provided on the back surface of the resin base 50, and the game board 60 is attached to the resin base 50 by the locking fittings 135 as described above. Here, the configuration of the back surface of the game board 60 will be described.

  A display control device is attached to the variable display unit 67 disposed in the center of the game board 60 so as to cover the variable display unit 67 from behind (not shown). An effect control device unit 142 is mounted behind the display control device so as to overlap the display control device. The effect control device unit 142 includes a notification / effect control device 610 and a mounting base 144, and the notification / effect control device 610 is mounted on the mounting base 144.

  The notification / production control device 610 includes a production control board that controls voice, lamp display, and display control apparatus in accordance with instructions from a main control apparatus to be described later, and the production control board is made of a transparent resin material or the like. It is housed and configured in a box 145.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a collective plate 150 is provided below the variable display unit 67 on the back surface of the game board 60. The collective board 150 is provided with a game ball collecting mechanism for collecting game balls won in various winning ports, a detection mechanism for detecting the entering of game balls into various winning ports, and the like.

  The game ball collecting mechanism will be described. The collective plate 150 is provided with a collecting passage corresponding to each of the various ball entering portions such as the general winning opening 61. These collection passages go down along the back surface of the game board 60 from these entrances, and define the fall path of the game balls. The collection paths meet near the lower end of the game board 60, and any game balls that have passed through the ball-entry portion such as the general winning opening 61 gather at the lower part of the game board 60 through the collection path. It becomes. The exit portion of each recovery passage is opened downward, and a discharge passage described later is provided on the front side (specifically, below the game board 60). The game balls gathered below the game board 60 by the collection passage are led out to the discharge passage. Similarly, the out port 68 leads to the discharge passage, and a game ball that has not won any prize opening is led out to the discharge passage through the out port 68.

  The detection mechanism will be described. The collective plate 150 is provided with detection sensors that individually correspond to various ball entering portions such as the general winning a prize opening 61. These various detection sensors are arranged in the middle of each collection passage that is connected to the ball entry portion such as the general winning opening 61, and the game ball falls in a state where the collection path of the game ball is defined in the collection passage. Detect passage. More specifically, each detection sensor detects a ball entering a ball entrance such as the general winning award 61 by passing a game ball through a detection area provided in the middle of each collection passage, Specifically, a magnetic sensor that grasps a change in a magnetic field that occurs when a game ball passes through the detection area is employed.

  These various detection sensors are electrically connected to a main control device unit 160 (specifically, a main control device) provided on the back side of the game board 60, and detection signals from these detection sensors are transmitted to the main control device. Output. Hereinafter, the main controller unit 160 and the configuration associated therewith will be described.

  The main controller unit 160 is mounted on the game board 60 so as to cover the collective plate 150 from the rear side, and includes a synthetic resin mounting base 161 and a main controller 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. It is configured. The main controller 162 includes a main control board having a function (main control circuit) that controls the main control of the game and a function (power failure monitoring circuit) that monitors the power source, and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be accommodated in a substrate box 163 made of, for example.

  The board box 163 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected so as not to be unsealed by a sealing portion as sealing means, whereby the substrate box 163 is sealed. A plurality of sealing portions are provided on the long side portion of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used for sealing processing.

  Any structure can be applied to the sealing part as long as the box base and the box cover are connected to each other so that they cannot be opened.However, the box base and the box cover can be connected by inserting a locking claw into the long hole constituting the sealing part. It is designed to be combined so that it cannot be opened. The sealing process by the sealing part prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing, and makes it possible to detect such a situation quickly and easily even if unauthorized opening is performed. It is possible to perform the sealing process again later. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting a locking claw into at least one of the plurality of sealing portions. When opening the board box 163 such as when a failure occurs in the housed main control board or when inspecting the main control board, the connecting part between the sealing part into which the locking claw is inserted and another sealing part is provided. Disconnect. As a result, the box base and the box cover of the substrate box 163 are separated, and the internal main control substrate can be taken out. Thereafter, when the sealing process is performed again, the locking claws are inserted into the long holes of the other sealing portions. If the history of opening the substrate box 163 is left in the substrate box 163, it can be easily found that the unauthorized opening has been performed by looking at the substrate box 163.

  A plurality of coupling pieces are provided on one short side portion of the substrate box 163 so as to protrude laterally. These coupling pieces have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of coupled pieces formed on the mounting base 161, and a sealing process is performed between the board box 163 and the mounting base 161 by the coupling pieces and the coupled pieces. Is called.

(Back pack unit 15)
Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 is covered from behind by the back pack unit 15. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 201, and a payout mechanism unit 202, a discharge passage board, and a control device assembly unit 204 are attached to the back pack 201.

  The back pack 201 is formed of a synthetic resin having transparency, and as shown in FIG. 3, a base portion 211 to which the payout mechanism portion 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover portion 212 that protrudes rearward from the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. And have. The protective cover 212 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to surround at least the variable display unit 67.

  The base portion 211 is provided with an external terminal plate 213 at the upper right portion thereof. The external terminal board 213 is provided with various output terminals, and various signals are output to the management control device on the game hall side through these output terminals. The base portion 211 is provided with a pair of upper and lower retaining pins at the right end when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the retaining pins are inserted into bearing fittings 132 (specifically, bearing portions) provided on the inner frame 13. By doing so, the back pack unit 15 is supported rotatably with respect to the inner frame 13. In addition, a fastening tool for fastening with respect to a fastening hole provided in the inner frame 13 is provided at the rotating front end portion of the base portion 211, and the fastening tool is fitted into the fastening hole. A back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13.

  In the base portion 211, a payout mechanism portion 202 is disposed so as to bypass the protective cover portion 212. The payout mechanism 202 is provided with a tank 221 that is arranged at the top of the back pack 201 and that opens upward, and game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 221. The A tank rail that is gently inclined toward the downstream side is connected to the lower side of the tank 221, and a case rail extending in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail. A payout device 222 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail. The game balls paid out from the payout device 222 are supplied to the game ball distribution unit provided in the base portion 211 of the back pack 201 through the payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 222.

  The game ball distribution unit has a function of distributing the game balls paid out from the payout device 222 to any one of the upper plate 33, the lower plate 34, and a discharge passage described later, and the inner opening is the main body side described above. The upper dish passage and the front door side upper dish path communicate with the upper dish 33, and the outer opening is formed so as to communicate with the main body side lower dish path and front door side lower dish path. .

  As shown in FIG. 3, the discharge passage board and the control device collective unit 204 are attached to the lower end portion of the base portion 211 so as to sandwich the lower end portion in the front-rear direction. In the discharge passage board 203, a discharge passage opened rearward is formed on a surface facing the control device assembly unit 204, and an open portion of the discharge passage is closed by the control device assembly unit 204. The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge the game ball to the island facility or the like of the game hall, and the game ball led to the discharge passage from the recovery passage described above passes through the discharge passage to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Discharged.

  The control device assembly unit 204 has a horizontally long mounting base on which a payout control device 181 and a power supply / launch control device 191 are mounted. The payout control device 181 and the power supply / launch control device 191 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 181 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

  In the payout control device 181, a payout control board for controlling the payout device 222 is accommodated in the board box, and a state return switch provided on the payout control board projects out of the board box. For example, when the state return switch is pressed when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout device 222, the ball jam is eliminated.

  The power supply / launch control device 191 includes a power supply / launch control board housed in a board box, and a predetermined power source required for various control devices is generated and output by the board, and a game ball is fired by a player. Control of the launch of the game ball accompanying the operation of the handle 41 is performed. Further, the power supply / launch control device 191 is provided with a RAM erase switch. This pachinko machine 10 has a function to store and store various data so that even if a power failure occurs, it maintains the state at the time of the power failure, and can be restored to the state at the time of the power failure at the time of recovery from the power failure. It has become. Therefore, for example, when the power is turned off in the normal procedure, as in the case of the game hall being closed, the state before the turn-off is stored and retained. However, if the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch, the RAM data is initialized. It has become.

(Electric configuration of the pachinko machine 10)
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

  An MPU 602 is mounted on a main control board 601 provided in the main controller 162. The MPU 602 is a ROM 603 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 602 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 603. The RAM 604 is an element including an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like.

  The MPU 602 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the MPU 602, a power failure monitoring board 605, a payout control device 181 and various detection sensors 151 to 156 provided in the main control device 162 are connected. The power failure monitoring board 605 is connected to a power supply / emission control device 191, and power is supplied to the MPU 602 via the power failure monitoring board 605. Also, as a part of the various detection sensors 151 to 156, a prize-winning entry part (payout-corresponding entry part) such as a general prize opening 61, variable prize-winning devices 64 and 65, actuated entry parts 62 and 63, a through gate 66, and the like. Are connected to each other, and the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 performs a winning determination (entrance determination) to each of the winning portions. In addition, the MPU 602 executes a jackpot generation lottery based on the winnings to the operation pitching units 62 and 63, and executes a support generation lottery based on the winnings to the through gate 66.

  On the output side of the MPU 602, a power failure monitoring board 605, a payout control device 181 and a notification / effect control device 610 are connected. For example, a payout ball command is output to the payout control device 181 based on a winning determination result to the winning-corresponding winning portion. In this case, when outputting the prize ball command, the command information storage area 603e of the ROM 603 is referred to. When a winning to the general winning opening 61 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to paying out 10 game balls is output, and when a winning to the variable winning device 64 is specified, 15 winning balls are output. When a winning ball command corresponding to the paying out of the game balls is output and the winning to the working ball entering portions 62 and 63 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the paying out of the three game balls is output.

  Various commands such as a change start command (change command), a type command, a change end command, an opening command, and an ending command are output to the notification / production control device 610. In this case, the command information storage area 603e of the ROM 603 is referred to when these various commands are output. Details of these various commands will be described later. Each command is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various information is included as information of the predetermined number of bytes.

  Further, on the output side of the MPU 602, variable ball driving units 64c and 65c for opening and closing the open / close doors of the variable prize winning devices 64 and 65, and an electric role driving unit for opening and closing the electric ball 71 of the operating ball entering unit 63 are opened and closed. 71b and the main display unit 81 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 601, and the MPU 602 controls these various configurations through the driver circuits.

  Specifically, drive control of the variable ball driving units 64c and 65c is executed in the MPU 602 so that the variable winning devices 64 and 65 are opened and closed in the open / close execution mode. In addition, in the case where the electrified winning combination 71 of the operating ball entering portion 63 is won, the MPU 602 executes drive control of the electrifying instrument driving unit 71b so that the electrifying accessory 71 is opened and closed. Further, the MPU 602 executes display control of the ball entrance display units DL, DU, DS and the hold number display unit HS of the main display unit 81.

  The power failure monitoring board 605 relays between the main control board 601 and the power / fire control device 191, and monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts that is the maximum voltage output from the power / fire control device 191. The payout control device 181 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 222 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 162.

  The power supply / launch control device 191 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 601, the payout control device 181 and the like, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. To do. The power supply / launch control device 191 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 110, and the game ball launch mechanism 110 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

  An MPU 612 is mounted on a notification / production control board 611 provided in the notification / production control device 610. The MPU 612 is a memory for temporarily storing various control programs executed by the MPU 612 and ROM 613 storing fixed value data, and various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 613. A RAM 614, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are incorporated.

  The MPU 612 is provided with an input port and an output port. The operation button 35 described above is connected to the input side of the MPU 612, and it is possible to grasp the presence or absence of an operation based on a signal from the operation button 35. On the output side of the MPU 612, light emitting units 26 to 28, a speaker unit 29, a display control device 620, and the like are connected.

  The MPU 612 controls the variable display unit 67 based on the command input from the main controller 162. Specifically, the notification / production control device 610 grasps the symbol variable display time (whether or not the reach production occurs) in the symbol display device 75 based on various commands input from the main control device 162, and finally The type of symbol combination to be stopped and displayed is determined and details of the contents of reach production are determined.

  The display control device 620 includes a display control board on which an MPU is mounted. The MPU has various control programs, a program ROM storing fixed value data, and various control programs stored in the program ROM. Built-in work RAM, video display processor (VDP), character ROM that stores image data, video RAM that temporarily stores image data read from character ROM, etc. Has been.

  The VDP is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver installed in the symbol display device 75. Since the VDP is formed as an IC chip, it is also called a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP should be said to be a microcomputer chip incorporating firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP adjusts the timing of each of the MPU, the video RAM, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 75.

  The character ROM plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 75. This character ROM holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. These image data, tables, etc. are stored in the character ROM.

  The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 75, and the display content of the symbol display device 75 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM.

  The MPU of the display control device 620 executes display control of the symbol display device 75 based on the command input from the notification / production control device 610. Specifically, the variable display is performed for each game time in accordance with the content of the variable display finally determined by the notification / production control device 610 and the type of combination of symbols to be stopped.

  Here, the display contents of the symbol display device 75 (display screen 75a) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a schematic view showing a display screen 75 a of the symbol display device 75.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of the upper, middle and lower stages are set. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 includes a main symbol and a sub symbol arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers in the upper symbol row Z1, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between the main symbols. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols. On the display screen 75a, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, the display screen 75a is configured such that 3 symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has come to be.

  Further, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right lowering line L4, and a right uppering line L5 are set on the display screen 75a. Then, the variable display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state in which a combination of symbols having the same number attached to any one of the effective lines is formed. When the variation display of .about.Z3 is completed, a jackpot video showing that a normal jackpot result and a probabilistic jackpot result, which will be described later, are displayed.

  In addition, the mode of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 75 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol rows, the direction of the symbol variable display in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. Can be appropriately changed. In addition, the symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 75 are not limited to the symbols as described above. For example, only a numeral may be variably displayed as a symbol. It is good also as a structure only of the design which is contained or the number is not attached | subjected.

  The pattern variation display mode in the symbol display device 75 will be described further. In the pachinko machine 10, reach display is performed as a stage before the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed when the jackpot result is notified as described above. Is set to Reach display (reach effect or reach state) is a game that includes a symbol display device 75 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of symbols (pictures), and becomes an open / close execution mode of the variable winning devices 64 and 65. In the gaming machine in which the stop display result after the variable display is the special display result, the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) in the symbol display device 75 is started and the stop display result is derived and displayed. This means a display state for making the player think that the display state is a variable display state that is likely to result in the special display result.

  In other words, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode is established by stopping the symbols for a part of the symbol sequences displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. This is a display state in which a combination of reach symbols that may be displayed is displayed, and in that state, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows.

  More specifically, as a step before ending the variable display of symbols, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode is established on a preset active line in the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of reach symbols that may possibly be displayed, and a symbol change display is performed by a final stop symbol row in a situation where the reach line is formed.

  A supplementary explanation of the reach display will be given based on FIG. 6. In the state where the symbol variation display is first ended in the upper symbol row Z 1 and the symbol variation display is terminated in the lower symbol row Z 3, A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols having the same numbers on the effective lines L1 to L5, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the change display of the symbols is displayed in the middle symbol row Z2. When it is done, it becomes reach display. When the open / close execution mode occurs, the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 are displayed in such a manner that the main symbols having the same numbers as the main symbols forming the reach line are stopped and displayed on the reach line. The change display of is terminated.

  In the reach display, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation display of symbols is performed on the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. There are those that produce an effect, and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen 75a after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols.

  On the display screen 75a, a hold display area NE is set in a portion below the variable display area ME having the variable display area of the upper symbol row, the variable display area of the middle symbol, and the variable display area of the lower symbol. ing. In the hold display area NE, the hold is divided in such a way that the same number of unit hold display areas Da1 to Da8 as the maximum hold number when the game ball is won in the operation balls 62, 63 are arranged in the left-right direction. A number display area Da is provided.

  Specifically, when the game ball enters the upper working ball entering portion 62, the maximum holding number is four, and when the game ball enters the lower working ball entering portion 63, the maximum holding number is four. . Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a total of eight pieces of hold information are stored in the order of winning in the upper working ball entering portion 62 and the lower working ball entering portion 63. Correspondingly, in the hold number display area Da, the first unit hold display area Da1, the second unit hold display area Da2, the third unit hold display area Da3, the fourth unit hold display area Da4, the fifth unit hold display. An area Da5, a sixth unit hold display area Da6, a seventh unit hold display area Da7, and an eighth unit hold display area Da8 are set.

  For example, in the case where the number of holds (total number of holds) when the game ball wins the activated balls 62 and 63 is 1, a predetermined hold display image MP is displayed only in the first unit hold display area Da1. In the case where the number of holds when the game balls are displayed and won in the activated balls 62 and 63 is four, the predetermined hold display is made in the first unit hold display area Da1 to the fourth unit hold display area Da4. The image MP is displayed. Note that FIG. 6B illustrates a case where the number of reservations is three.

  Further, in the hold display area NE, a hold display image corresponding to the game time being executed (running) so as to be side by side with the hold number display area Da (specifically, the first unit hold display area Da1). An execution target display area Db in which MP is displayed is provided.

  When the game round is finished and the next game round is started, the hold display image MP displayed in the hold count display area Da (first unit hold display area Da1) moves to the execution target display area Db. The hold display image MP displayed in the hold number display area Da is shifted to the lower side.

(About various counters)
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The MPU 602 uses the various counter information in the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, display setting of the display unit DL and DU for the operation ball entry, outline setting of the symbol display of the symbol display device 75, etc. Is a jackpot random number counter C1 used for lottery generation, a jackpot type counter C2 used to determine a jackpot type such as a 16R probability variation jackpot result or a 4R probability variation jackpot result, and a symbol display device 75 corresponding to the result of losing Reach random number counter C3 used for reach lottery display, etc., random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the display units DL and DU for the operation ball entry, and the symbol display The fluctuation type counter CS that determines the fluctuation display time in the device 75 is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory release counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 71 of the lower operation entry portion 63 is set in the electric utility open state (support state) is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 604d of the RAM 604.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 604a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 604. The information stored in the lottery counter buffer 604a (information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3) is stored in the RAM 604 when a winning is made to the operating ball entering units 62 and 63. Is stored in a reserved ball storage area 604b provided as “acquired information storage means”.

  The holding ball storage area 604b includes a holding area RE for an operating port and an execution area AE. The reserved area RE includes a first area Ra1, a second area Ra2, a third area Ra3, a fourth area Ra4, a fifth area Ra5, a sixth area Ra6, a seventh area Ra7, and an eighth area Ra8. Depending on the winning history of the winning units 62 and 63, each of the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer 604a is set as any of the holding information. Stored in areas Ra1 to Ra8. The hold information corresponds to “special information”.

  In the first area Ra1 to the eighth area Ra8, when winning to the working ball entering portions 62 and 63 occurs continuously a plurality of times, the first area Ra1 → second area Ra2 → third area Ra3 → fourth. Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of area Ra4 → 5th area Ra5 → 6th area Ra6 → 7th area Ra7 → 8th area Ra8. By providing the eight areas Ra1 to Ra8 in this way, up to four (total eight) game ball entry histories to the operation entry parts 62 and 63 are held and stored. Yes. Further, the reserved ball storage area 604b is provided with a total number-of-holds storage area FE, and the total number-of-holds storage area FE is acquired and stored on the basis of the balls entered into the operation balls 62, 63. Information for specifying the number of stored information is stored.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical information stored in the first area Ra1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the display units DL and DU for the operation ball entry. At the start of the turn, determination of success or failure is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

  The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured such that one by one is added in order within a range of 0 to 599, for example, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 604b of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the operating ball entering portions 62 and 63.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a success / failure table (availability information group) in a success / failure table storage area 603a as a success / failure information group storage means in the ROM 603. As the success / failure table, a success / failure table for the low probability mode (low probability success / failure information group) and a high probability mode's success / failure table (high probability success / failure information group) are set. That is, in the present pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning lottery means.

  In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, as shown in FIG. 8 (a), the value of the random number for winning the big hit (that is, the winning information) is “7”, “307” and “507”. That is, among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 of “0” to “599”, “7”, “307”, “507” correspond to the jackpot result, and the jackpot probability is 1/200.

  On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, as shown in FIG. 8B, the value of the random number for winning the big hit (that is, the winning information) is “7”. ”,“ 107 ”...“ 407 ”,“ 507 ”. That is, among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 of “0” to “599”, “7”, “107”... “407”, “507” correspond to the jackpot result, and the jackpot probability is the low probability mode. (In detail, 1/100).

  If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 29, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 29) and then returns to 0. Here, in the present embodiment, the distribution destination of the game result using the jackpot type counter C2 (that is, the lottery result by the winning / failing lottery and the distribution lottery) is stored in a distribution table as a distribution information group storage unit in the ROM 603. It is stored in the area 603b as a distribution table (distribution information group). Here, the contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. As shown in FIG. 9, as the sorting table, there are a sorting table (first sorting information group) for the upper working entrance shown in FIG. 9 (a) and a lower working shown in FIG. 9 (b). A distribution table (second distribution information group) for the entrance part is set.

  In the allocation table for the upper actuating pitching part, as the distribution destination of the game result, 8R probability variation jackpot result (high probability corresponding special game result), 8R normal jackpot result (low probability correspondence special game result), 4R probability variation jackpot result (High probability correspondence game result) 4R normal jackpot result (low probability correspondence game result) is set. Specifically, in the allocation table for the upper action ball entry portion, among the values of the big hit type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 8” corresponds to the 8R probability variation big hit result, and “9 “14” corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot result, “15-23” corresponds to the 4R probability variable jackpot result, and “24 to 29” corresponds to the 4R normal jackpot result.

  In the distribution table for the lower side actuated entry, the game results are allocated to 16R probability variation jackpot results (high probability special game results), 8R probability variation jackpot results (high probability special game results), and 8R normal jackpots. A result (low probability corresponding special game result), 4R probability variable jackpot result (high probability corresponding game result), and 4R normal jackpot result (low probability corresponding game result) are set. Specifically, in the distribution table for the upper action ball entry portion, among the values of the big hit type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 5” corresponds to the 16R probability variation big hit result, and “6 “11” corresponds to the 8R probability variation jackpot result, “12-17” corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot result, “18-23” corresponds to the 4R probability variation jackpot result, “24-29” Corresponds to the 4R normal jackpot result.

  The 16R probability variation jackpot result, the 8R probability variation jackpot result, and the 4R probability variation jackpot result are jackpot results in which the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. However, the high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift.

  The 8R normal jackpot result and the 4R normal jackpot result are jackpots in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. It is a result. However, this high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) later.

  As already described, the display unit DU, DL for the operation entrance unit is configured by a large number of LEDs. Although the pattern displayed on the display unit DU, DL for the operation entrance part is distinguished from the case where the result is a promising jackpot result and the case where the normal jackpot result is obtained, the probable jackpot result is determined from the light emission mode of these LEDs. / It is difficult to determine the normal jackpot result. Further, the symbol combination displayed on the symbol display device 75 when the probability variation jackpot result is obtained and the symbol combination displayed on the symbol display device 75 when the normal jackpot result is obtained are made common.

  Also, the game flow after the opening / closing execution mode and the opening / closing execution mode ends is common, and the symbol display device indicates whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode / low probability mode until a state notification described later is executed It is difficult to discriminate from display effects in various effect devices such as 75.

  When the lottery mode is the high probability mode, the jackpot result is more likely than when the lottery mode is the low probability mode. Therefore, a game is performed while expecting that the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Here, it is possible to make the player predict whether the lottery mode is the high-probability mode or the low-probability mode by declaring information that can identify the lottery mode. Thereby, the attention degree to the game is improved.

  For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 238) and then returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and stored in the reserved ball storage area 604b of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the operating ball entering portions 62 and 63. More specifically, the game balls are stored in the holding area RE of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game balls are won in the operation ball entering sections 62 and 63. Then, based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 603, it is determined whether to generate a reach. However, in the game times that shift to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 602 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

  For example, the variation type counter CS is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 198) and then returns to 0. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 602 determines the variation display time in the display unit DL and DU for the operation entrance ball and the variation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 75. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the symbol display device 75 determines the variation pattern when the symbol variation starts.

  When determining the variable display time in the symbol display device 75 and the main display unit 81 (display unit DL, DU for the operation ball entry unit), the buffer values of the reach random number counter C3 and the variable type counter CS, the variable display time table of the ROM 603 The variable display time table stored in the storage area 603c is referred to. Further, the MPU 602 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE to determine the stop results (pictures) in the display unit DL and DU for the action ball entry unit. However, in the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 603d of the ROM 603 is used.

  For example, the electric accessory release counter C4 is incremented by 1 in order within a range of 0 to 249 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 249). The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric combination reservation area 604c of the RAM 604 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 66. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 71 attached to the lower operation ball entry portion 63 to the open state based on the value of the stored electric accessory release counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 199, the electric accessory 71 is controlled to the open state, and if C4 = 200 to 249, the electric accessory 71 is not controlled to the open state.

(About various processes executed by the main controller 162)
Next, a timer interrupt process and a normal process that are executed when the MPU 602 in the main controller 162 advances the game at each game time will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, the MPU 602 executes a main process that is started when the power is turned on and an NMI interrupt process that is started when a power failure signal is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). Explanation of these various processes is omitted.

(Timer interrupt processing)
First, the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started periodically by the MPU 602 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In step S101, reading processing of various winning detection sensors is executed. That is, various winning detection sensors connected to the main control device 162 (detection sensor 151 for the general winning opening 61, detection sensor 152 for the upper operation entrance 62, detection sensor 153 for the lower operation entrance 63) , The state of the detection sensor 154 for the lower variable prize-winning device 64, the detection sensor 155 for the right-side variable prize-winning device 65, and the detection sensor 156 for the through gate are read, and the detection information ( (Winning detection information) is stored in the buffer area. Although details will be described later, the present embodiment is configured to refer to the presence or absence of winning in the through gate 66 even in the normal processing. Therefore, information indicating the presence / absence of winning in the through gate 66 is stored separately for information corresponding to the timer interrupt processing and information corresponding to the normal processing, and the stored information is erased in each processing. It becomes the composition which is done.

  Thereafter, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604.

  In subsequent step S103, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and are cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604.

  In a succeeding step S104, a through winning process associated with winning through the through gate 66 is executed. The through winning process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the through winning process, first, in step S201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 66 based on the winning detection information stored in the buffer area. When an affirmative determination is made in step S201, the process proceeds to step S202, where it is determined whether or not the number of stored item reservations (number of stored electronic features SN) stored in the electronic role reservation area 604c is less than four. . If an affirmative determination is made in step S202, 1 is added to the number of retained electric utility numbers SN in step S203, and the value of the electric utility product release counter C4 is stored in the retained electric utility area in step S204. Moreover, the process for lighting the display part DH for the number of holdings of the main display unit 81 corresponding to the number of holdings is performed.

  After executing the winning process for the through gate in step S104, the process proceeds to step S105, and in step S105, the winning process for the operating opening accompanying the winning to the operating ball entering parts 62, 63 is executed, and this timer interruption process Exit. Here, the winning process for the operation port will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

(Prize processing for working port)
As shown in FIG. 12, in the winning process for the operation opening, first, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (wins) the upper operation entering part 62. If it is determined that the game ball has entered the upper working ball entry portion 62, the process proceeds to step S302, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 181 to pay out three game balls is set.

  In the subsequent step S303, an external signal setting process is performed to output information indicating that a game ball has entered the upper operation ball entry unit 62 to the hall computer HC on the game hall side. As a result, the hall computer HC recognizes that the entrance into the upper operation entrance portion 62 has occurred. Thereafter, in step S304, an information acquisition process for storing each value such as the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 is performed, and the main winning process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S301 that the game ball has not won the upper action ball entry portion 62, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (wins) the lower action entry unit 63. If it is determined that the game ball has entered the lower operation ball entry unit 63, the process proceeds to step S305, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 181 to pay out four game balls is set. The prize ball command set in steps S302 and S305 is transmitted to the payout control device 181 in an external output process S501 of a normal process described later.

  In the subsequent step S307, an external signal setting process is performed so as to output information indicating that a game ball has entered the lower operation ball entry unit 63 to the hall computer HC on the game hall side. Thereby, it is grasped by the hall computer HC that the entrance to the lower operation entrance portion 63 has occurred. Thereafter, an information acquisition process is performed in step S304, and the main winning process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in both steps S301 and S305, that is, if there is no entry in any of the upper operation entry section 62 and the lower operation entry section 63, the main winning process is performed as it is. Exit. Here, the information acquisition processing in step S304 will be described with reference to FIG.

(Information acquisition process)
In the information acquisition process, first, in step S401, the number N of starting reserved balls stored in the reserved number storage area FE of the reserved ball storage area 604b, more specifically, of the upper operating ball entering unit 62 and the lower operating ball entering unit 63 It is determined whether or not the number N of starting reserved balls related to the pitching part that triggered the information acquisition process is less than an upper limit value (“4” in the present embodiment). If the start hold storage number N is the upper limit value, the information acquisition process is terminated as it is. If the start hold storage number N is less than the upper limit value, the start hold storage number N of the corresponding entry portion is incremented by 1 in step S402. At the same time, the total number of holds stored in the hold number storage area FE in step S403 (hereinafter referred to as a common hold number CRN) is incremented by one.

  In the subsequent step S404, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS updated in the above step S103 are stored in the free storage area area of the working port holding area RE. The information is stored in the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the common hold number CRN incremented by 1 in step S402, and the information acquisition process is terminated.

  In the information acquisition process, although not shown in the drawings, a notification / production control device 610 and a display control device, which are control devices on the sub-side (sub-side), that a winning in the operation ball entering portions 62 and 63 has occurred. A confirmation process for hold notice and a process for setting a hold command, which are processes for causing the process to be recognized by 620 and executing a hold notice to be described later, are executed. The hold command set in the hold command setting process is transmitted to the notification / production control device 610 and the display control device 620 in a normal process external output process (step S501) described later. The display control device 620 receives the hold command and executes a process for changing the display in the hold number display area Da described above in accordance with the increase in the hold number.

  Specifically, when the display control device 620 receives the same command via the notification / production control device 610, the display control device 620 displays the hold display image MP in the hold number display area Da. A process for (for example) adding is executed. In the hold number display area Da, the hold images are displayed sequentially from the left side. For example, if the common hold number CRN is 1, the hold image is displayed in the first unit hold display area Da1 at the left end, and the common hold is displayed. If the number CRN is 8, the hold image is displayed in the eighth unit hold display area Da8 that is the eighth from the left.

(Normal processing)
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an outline, the processing of steps S501 to S506 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S508 and S509 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the normal processing, first, external signal output processing is executed in step S501. In the external signal output process of step S501, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 181. In addition, when various commands such as a command for change such as a change command, a type command, a change end command, a hold command, and a shift command described later are set, the command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 610. To do.

  Next, in step S502, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604.

  In subsequent step S503, a game time control process for controlling a game in each game time is executed. In the game times control process, jackpot determination, setting of the outline of the symbol variation display mode by the symbol display device 75, display control of the main display unit 81, and the like are performed.

  After executing the game turn control process of step S503, the process proceeds to step S504, and the game state transition process is executed. Although details will be described later, the gaming state shifts to an opening / closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like by this gaming state transition processing. Details of the game turn control process in step S503 and the game state transition process in step S504 will be described later.

  In the subsequent step S505, a power combination support process for controlling the driving of the power combination 71 provided in the lower operation entrance portion 63 is executed. In this electronic combination support process, the electronic combination release indicating whether or not to make the electric combination 71 open using the numerical information acquired from the electric combination release counter C4 stored in the electronic combination holding area 604c of the RAM 604 is performed. A lottery is performed, and when the electrified open state is won, an opening / closing process of the electric accessory 71 is executed. In addition, display control of the through gate display unit DS is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the electric role release lottery.

  As already described, the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are set as the modes of support by the electric accessory 71, and the transition to one of the support modes is performed in the gaming state transition process. After this processing, the high frequency support mode is set when the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604, and the low frequency support mode is set when the flag is not set.

  In the electric power support process, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is set by determining whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604. In the high-frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric accessory 71 is in the open state is set more frequently when the electrified open state is won than in the low-frequency support mode. Set a longer opening time. Further, in the high frequency support mode, when the electrified open state is selected and the open state of the electric accessory 71 occurs a plurality of times, the next open state is started after one open state is completed. The closing time until is set to be shorter than one opening time.

  Incidentally, when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the support mode is forcibly set to the low frequency support mode even if the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604. In the preparation mode, which will be described later, the high-frequency support mode is configured to be continued, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the support mode is forcibly switched to the low-frequency support mode in the preparation mode. It is also possible to do.

  Thereafter, in step S506, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid 111 of the game ball launch mechanism 110 is excited once every predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that a launch permission signal is input from the power supply / launch control device 191. To do. Thereby, a game ball is launched toward the game area PE.

  In subsequent step S507, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing.

  That is, in step S508, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 604. In step S509, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when those counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 604.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S501 to S506 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and varies. Therefore, it is possible to update the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1) at random by repeatedly executing the update of the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time. The variation type counter CS can also be updated at random.

(Game control process)
Next, the game times control process of step S503 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 15, in the game times control process, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not it is in an opening / closing execution mode or a preparation mode described later. When the opening / closing execution mode or the preparation mode is in progress, the processing after step S602, that is, the game turn start processing at steps S603 to S605 and the game turn progress processing at steps S606 to S609 are not executed. The game times control process is terminated.

  If it is neither the opening / closing execution mode nor the preparation mode, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the game is being played. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the display unit DL, DU for the operation ball entry unit of the main display unit 81 is in a variable display or a fixed display. When the display part DL, DU for operation entering balls is neither in the variable display nor in the fixed display, the process proceeds to the game turn starting process in steps S603 to S605. In the game round start process, first, in step S603, it is determined whether or not the total number of start holding balls (common holding number CRN) is “0”. The case where the common holding number CRN is “0” means that the holding information is not stored in the holding ball storage area 604b. Accordingly, the game turn control process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the common hold number CRN is not “0”, a data setting process for setting the data stored in the holding area RE of the holding ball storage area 604b in step S604 for variable display is executed. Further, in step S605, after executing the variation start process for starting the variation display on the main display unit 81 and the variation display on the symbol display device 75, the game number control process is terminated.

  In the data setting process, first of all, the number N of starting reserved balls stored in the reserved number storage area FE and the common reserved number CRN are decremented by one. Subsequently, the data stored in the first area Ra1 of the holding area RE is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, a process of shifting data stored in the areas Ra1 to Ra8 (that is, the holding information) of the holding area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first area Ra1 to the eighth area Ra8 to the lower area side, clearing the data in the first area Ra1, and the second area Ra2 → 1st area Ra1, 3rd area Ra3 → 2nd area Ra2, 4th area Ra4 → 3rd area Ra3, 5th area Ra5 → 4th area Ra4, 6th area Ra6 → 5th area Ra5, 7th area Ra7 → The data in each area is shifted such as the sixth area Ra6, the eighth area Ra8, and the seventh area Ra7.

  After the data is shifted, a shift command that is information for causing the notification / production control device 610 to recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted is set. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated. The shift command is transmitted to the display control device 620 via the notification / production control device 610 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 14). The display control device 620 receives the shift command, and executes a process for changing the display in the reserved number display area Da for the operation port in accordance with the decrease in the reserved number.

(Variation start processing)
Next, the variation start process of step S605 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the change start process, first, in step S701, a success / failure determination process for determining whether or not the hold information referred to in the current change start process corresponds to the big win is executed. Specifically, the information acquired from the information for jackpot determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the information updated by the jackpot random number counter C1 is grasped. When the lottery mode is the low probability mode, the information obtained by referring to the low probability mode success / failure table stored in the success / failure table storage area 603a of the ROM 603 is included in the information corresponding to the jackpot winner. If the lottery mode is the high probability mode, referring to the high-probability mode success / failure table stored in the success / failure table storage area 603a of the ROM 603, the information obtained as described above becomes a big win. Identify whether it is included in the corresponding information.

  In subsequent step S702, it is determined whether or not the result of the success / failure determination process in step S701 is a result corresponding to the jackpot winning (hereinafter referred to as a jackpot result). If the result corresponds to the big win, the type determination process is executed in step S703.

  In the type determination process, the information acquired from the information for type determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the information updated by the big hit type counter C2 is grasped. In addition, referring to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 603b of the ROM 603, the information for type determination as described above is information corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot result, information corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot result, 8R The information corresponding to the normal jackpot result, the information corresponding to the 4R probability variable jackpot result, and the information corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot result are specified. Specifically, when the holding information corresponds to the entry to the upper operation entrance portion 62, the distribution table for the upper operation entry portion 62 is referred to, and the hold information is the lower operation entry portion. If it corresponds to the entry to 63, the type determination is performed with reference to the distribution table for the lower operation entry portion 63.

  In the subsequent step S704, a jackpot stop result setting process is executed based on the information specified in the type determination process in step S703. If it is determined in step S702 that the winning combination is not a big win (in the case of a losing result), a losing stop result setting process is executed in step S705.

  In each stop result setting process in step S704 and step S705, information on the pattern mode that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 81 is stored in the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the stop result table storage area 603d of the ROM 603. The information is specified by referring to the stored stop result table, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 604. Also, in steps S705 and S706, information for specifying the current determination result is stored in various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604. Specifically, a 16R probability variable jackpot flag is stored if the result is a 16R probability variable jackpot result, an 8R probability variable jackpot flag is stored if the result is an 8R probability variable jackpot result, and an 8R normal value is determined if the result is an 8R normal jackpot result. A jackpot flag is stored, and if it is a 4R probability variable jackpot result, a 4R probability variable jackpot flag is stored, and if it is a 4R normal jackpot result, a 4R normal jackpot flag is stored.

  After executing any one of steps S704 and S705, a variable display time setting process is executed in step S706. The variable display time of each game time is determined based on various information such as the number of stored hold information, the presence / absence of reach, and the result of determination of success / failure. After the variable display time setting process is executed in step S706, a variable command and a type command are set in step S707. The change command includes information on presence / absence of reach and information on change display time. The type command includes game result information. That is, in the type command, as information on game results, information on 16R probability variation jackpot results, information on 8R probability variation jackpot results, information on 8R regular jackpot results, information on 4R probability variation jackpot results, information on 4R regular jackpot results, outlier results This information is included.

  The change command and type command set in step S707 are transmitted to the notification / production control device 610 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 14). In the notification / production control device 610, based on the received variation command and type command, the light emission pattern of the annular illumination unit 26 and the sound output pattern from the speaker unit 29 in the game time are determined, and the determined production is performed. The annular illumination unit 26 and the speaker unit 29 are controlled so that the contents of the above are executed. In addition, the notification / production control device 610 transmits the change command and the type command to the display control device 620 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 620 grasps the variation display pattern in the symbol display device 75 in the game time based on the received variation command and type command, and the symbol display device executes the grasped variation display pattern. 75 is displayed and controlled. Thereafter, in step S708, the variation display of the pattern is started on the display unit DL, DU for the operation entrance portion of the main display unit 81, and then the variation start process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the game times control process (FIG. 15), when the action entry part display units DL and DU of the main display unit 81 are in a variable display, the process for proceeding the game times in steps S606 to S609 is performed. Run. In the process for advancing game times, first, in step S606, it is determined whether or not the current game time fluctuation display time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display counter stored in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 604 is “0”. The value of the variation display counter is set in the variation display time setting process described above. Further, the value of the set fluctuation display counter is decremented (subtracted) every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10) is started.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S607. In the variable display process, the display mode in the display section DL, DU for the operation entrance part of the main display unit 81 is changed. Thereafter, the game times control process is terminated.

  If the fluctuation display time has elapsed, a fluctuation end process is executed in step S608. In the variation end process, the information stored in the RAM 604 in the process of either step S704 or step S705 is specified, and the main display unit 81 stops the display corresponding to the picture corresponding to the information. The display 81 for operating ball entry is controlled.

  In the subsequent step S609, a change end command is set. Thereafter, the game times control process is terminated. The variation end command set in step S609 is transmitted to the notification / production control device 610 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 14). The notification / production control device 610 transmits the received change end command to the display control device 620 while maintaining the information form. By receiving the change end command, the display control device 620 displays a final stop symbol combination in the game round on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 (final stop display).

(Game state transition process)
Next, the gaming state transition processing in step S504 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the game state transition process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S802. In the present embodiment, when a jackpot result is obtained, after the confirmation display is performed, the opening / closing execution mode is entered when a prescribed number (specifically, two) of game balls win the through gate 66. Transition. In step S802, it is determined whether or not the state (preparation mode) before the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is set. If a negative determination is made in step S802, the process proceeds to step S803.

  In step S803, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the game round has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the pattern variation display (specifically, the fixed display) on the working entrance display units DL and DU of the main display unit 81 is completed. If it is not the timing at which the game round has ended, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If it is the timing when the game round is completed, it is determined in step S804 whether or not the game result of the current game round corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, 8R probability variation jackpot flag, 8R normal jackpot flag, 4R probability variation jackpot flag, 4R normal jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604. To do. If none of the above flags is stored, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is. If any one of the above flags is stored, after executing the transition process to the preparation mode (preparation mode transition process) in step S805, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  Here, the preparation mode transition processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the preparation mode transition process, first, the process for game times is restricted in step S901. Specifically, the game times control restriction flag is set in various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604. The game times control restriction flag is deleted when the preparation mode → open / close execution mode ends. Thus, an affirmative determination is made in step S601 until the opening / closing execution mode ends, and various processes for game times are avoided.

  After executing the process of step S901, the process proceeds to step S902, and a preparation mode flag is set in various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604. Thus, the preparation mode is set. After setting the preparation mode start command in the subsequent step S903, the preparation mode transition process is terminated.

  The preparation mode start command set in step S903 is output to the notification / production control device 610 in the external output process (see step S501) of the normal process. The notification / production control device 610 receives the preparation mode start command, grasps that the preparation mode starts, and outputs an image and sound corresponding to the preparation mode to notify that the preparation mode has been shifted to. Process.

  Returning again to the description of FIG. If the preparation mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 604e of the RAM 604, an affirmative determination is made in step S802, and the process proceeds to step S806. In step S806, preparation mode processing is executed. Here, the preparation mode process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Preparation mode processing)
In the preparation mode process, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not a winning to the through gate 66 has occurred. If a negative determination is made in step S1001, the preparation mode processing is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, the process proceeds to step S1002. In step S1002, the value of the through gate winning counter provided in the various counter areas 604d of the RAM 604 is updated. The through gate winning counter is a counter for grasping the number of winnings to the through gate 66 (corresponding to “actuating gate”) in the preparation mode (a special mode described later).

  After executing the update process in step S1002, the process proceeds to step S1003. In step S1003, it is determined whether or not the current winning place is the left through gate 66 (left through gate 66L) of the left and right through gates 66. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1003, a left through gate winning command is set in step S1004. If a negative determination is made in step S1003, that is, if the current winning destination is the right through gate 66 (right through gate 66R), a right through gate winning command is set in step S1105.

  These left through gate winning command and right through gate winning command are output to the notification / production control device 610 in the external output processing (see step S501) of the normal processing. The notification / production control device 610 grasps the winning place and the winning order based on these commands.

  After executing the process of step S1004 or step S1005, the process proceeds to step S1006. In step S1006, it is determined whether or not the value of the through gate winning counter is a specified value (specifically “2”). If a negative determination is made in step S1006, the preparation mode processing is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1006, the preparation mode flag is erased and the through gate winning counter is reset in step S1007. Then, after executing the opening / closing execution mode transition process in step S1008, the preparation mode transition process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the situation where the preparation mode is set, when the through-gate 66 is won twice, the preparation mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode. In other words, even if the result is a jackpot result, it does not immediately shift to the opening / closing execution mode, but the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is that the prescribed number of winnings to the through gate 66 occurs during the preparation mode. It is an opportunity. In the present embodiment, these through gates 66 correspond to so-called “operation gates”. Next, the opening / closing execution mode transition processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Open / close execution mode transition processing)
In the opening / closing execution mode transition process, first, in step S1101, the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 604d of the RAM 604 is set to values determined according to the jackpot type, specifically “16”, “8”. , “4” is set. The round counter RC is a counter for counting the number of times the special winning openings 64a and 65a are opened.

  After executing the setting process of step S1101, the process proceeds to step S1102. In step S1102, an open / close execution mode flag is set in various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604. As a result, the preparation mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, and in the subsequent gaming state transition processing, an affirmative determination is made in step S801. In the subsequent step S1103, if the high frequency support mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604 in order to change the support mode by the electric accessory 71 to the low frequency support mode, it is deleted.

  In step S1104, an opening command is set. The set opening command is output to the notification / production control device 610 in the external output process (see step S501) of the normal process. The notification / production control device 610 executes processing for performing display (opening display) corresponding to the start of the opening / closing execution mode based on the opening command.

  After executing the external signal setting process in subsequent step S1105, the gaming state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the jackpot signal output terminal provided on the external terminal plate 213 is set to the jackpot signal output state. When the jackpot signal output terminal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the jackpot signal is output to the management control device. Thereby, it can be grasped that a big hit has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 in the management control device.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 17, if an affirmative determination is made in step S <b> 801, that is, if it is determined that the open / close execution mode is being performed, the process proceeds to step S <b> 807. In step S807, it is determined whether it is the timing when the opening is completed. If a negative determination is made in step S807, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S807, a special winning opening / closing process is executed in step S808.

  In the special winning opening / closing process, when the special winning openings 64a and 65a are closed, the variable entry driving units 64c and 65c are set in the driving state on condition that the round counter RC is “1” or more. In this way, the special winning openings 64a and 65a are opened. In the present embodiment, the right variable winning device 65 (right big winning port 65a) is subject to opening and closing when the 16R probability variable jackpot result is reached, and the lower variable winning device 64 when any other jackpot result is reached. (Lower big prize opening 64a) is to be opened and closed.

  When the special winning openings 64a and 65a are being opened, a predetermined time (specifically, 30 sec) has elapsed since the opening of the special winning openings 64a and 65a, or a predetermined number (specifically, ten). ), The driving of the variable ball driving units 64c and 65c is stopped, and the big winning holes 64a and 65a are closed. Thereafter, the grand prize winning openings 64a and 65a are maintained in a closed state over a predetermined interval period, and the grand prize winning openings 64a and 65a to be opened are opened again when the predetermined interval period elapses. The game will be repeated.

  In a succeeding step S809, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “0”. If the value of the round counter RC is not “0”, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is. If the value of the round counter RC is “0”, it is determined in step S810 whether or not it is the timing when the ending of the opening / closing execution mode has ended. If a negative determination is made in step S810, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S810, the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed in step S811, and then the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  In the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the support mode by the electric accessory 71 is set to the high frequency support mode regardless of which jackpot result is triggered. The high-frequency support mode is continued until the game times executed in the high-frequency support mode reaches the end reference number (upper limit: specifically 100 times) or until a big hit result is obtained during the high-frequency support mode. The After the high frequency support mode ends, the support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode.

  When the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by any of the 16R probability variation jackpot result, the 8R probability variation jackpot result, and the 4R probability variation jackpot result, the lottery mode is switched to the high probability mode. The high probability mode is continued until the next jackpot result, and when the next jackpot result is the 8R normal jackpot result or the 4R jackpot result, the mode is shifted to the low probability mode. On the other hand, when the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the 8R normal jackpot result or the 4R normal jackpot result, the lottery mode is switched to the low probability mode.

  Thereafter, the flags stored in the various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604 out of the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R normal jackpot flag, 4R probability variable jackpot flag and 4R normal jackpot flag are erased, and the game state transition is made. The process ends.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery mode is switched between the high probability mode and the low probability mode when the jackpot result is obtained. As already described, it is difficult to determine which of these two modes is based on the display on the symbol display device 75 or information such as BGM from the speaker unit 29. In the high probability mode, compared with the low probability mode, the period until the next big hit is likely to be shortened, and the monotonization of the game can be suppressed. Further, by making it difficult to determine the state of the game as described above, it is possible to favorably expect the high probability mode even during the low probability mode.

  Here, in the gaming machine shown in the present embodiment, the lottery mode notification (status notification) after the opening / closing execution mode ends may be made according to the game in the process of shifting from the preparation mode to the opening / closing execution mode. This is one of the features. Specifically, as described above, the occurrence of a predetermined number of winnings to the through gate 66 during the preparation mode is a trigger for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, and depending on the order of winning to the left and right through gates 66 The branching occurs when the state notification is made and when the state notification is not made. Hereinafter, a state notification preparation process and a state notification mode setting process executed by the notification / production control device 610 will be described in order to exhibit such a function. The state notification preparation processing and the state notification mode setting processing are processing executed as part of the regular processing by the MPU 612 of the notification / production control device 610.

(Preparation process for status notification)
As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20A, in the state notification preparation process, it is first determined in step S1201 whether or not a preparation mode start command has been received from the main controller 162. If a negative determination is made in step S1201, the present state notification preparation process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, the process proceeds to step S1202.

  In step S1202, a hit type confirmation process is executed. Specifically, the operation mode of the variable winning device 65 in the open / close execution mode is the same for each jackpot result of 16R probability variation jackpot result, 8R probability variation jackpot result, 8R normal variation jackpot result, 4R probability variation jackpot result, and 4R regular jackpot result. 16R probability variation jackpot results A to D, 8R probability variation jackpot results A to D, 8R normal jackpot results A to D, 4R probability variation jackpot results A to D, 4R set so that the gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode ends is the same Normally, jackpot results A to D are provided, and a command (for example, a type command) transmitted from the main control device 162 includes information indicating which jackpot result. In the confirmation processing in step S1202, it is confirmed to which jackpot result the present preparation mode corresponds among these various jackpot results.

  In subsequent step S1203, a winning order corresponding to the state notification is set based on the confirmation result in step S1202. For example, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 20B, in the case of 16R probability variation jackpot result A, the right through gate 66R → right through gate 66R is set as a winning order corresponding to the status notification, and the 16R probability variation jackpot result B In this case, the right through gate 66R → the left through gate 66L is set as the winning order corresponding to the state notification.

  After the winning order of the state notification mode is set in step S1203, the process proceeds to step S1204. In the present embodiment, a part of the 16R probability variation jackpot result (specifically, the 16R probability variation jackpot result B, C) and a part of the 8R probability variation jackpot result (specifically, the 8R probability variation jackpot result B, C) are determined in step S1203. The winning order corresponding to the set state notification will be notified. In step S1204, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot result corresponds to notification of winning order. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1204, a winning start teaching start process corresponding to the state notification is executed in step S1205.

  By executing the teaching start processing in order of winning corresponding to the state notification, the through gate 66 to be aimed at is clearly displayed in order on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. Specifically, the through gate 66 to be targeted first is clearly specified until the first winning to the through gate 66 is generated, and when the winning to the specified through gate 66 is generated, the through gate 66 to be targeted next is specified. Will be specified. By generating winnings in the order taught in this manner, the condition notification execution condition is satisfied when the condition for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode is satisfied.

  After executing the process of step S1205, or when a negative determination is made in step S1204, the state notification preparation completion flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 614 in step S1206 and the preparation process for the current state notification is performed. finish.

  Upon completion of the state notification preparation process, the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 has entered a state in which a lottery for state notification is executed to the player, and how to play a game in that state. (Game state) is suggested. Specifically, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 21A, a message prompting the player to place a winning order is displayed on the display screen 75a. Then, a message indicating that the target to be aimed is the left through gate 66L or the right through gate R is displayed. When the first winning is generated, a message prompting to aim at the left through gate 66L or the right through gate R again is displayed. After that, after the correct / incorrect answer in the winning order is clearly indicated, the status notification is executed at the timing described later. In addition, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which correct / incorrect answers in the winning order are clearly indicated.

  Here, the status notification is executed at different timings when the condition notification execution condition according to the winning order is satisfied and when the execution condition is not satisfied. In general, when the execution conditions related to the winning order are satisfied (when the answer is correct in the order of winning), the notification is executed at an earlier timing than when the execution condition is not satisfied (when the winning order is incorrect). It becomes. Hereinafter, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 21B, a control process (state notification mode setting process) related to the execution of the state notification will be described.

(Status notification mode setting process)
In the state notification mode setting process, first, it is determined in step S1301 whether or not a state notification preparation completion flag is set. If a positive determination is made in step S1301, the process proceeds to step S1302. In step S1302, it is determined whether or not a through gate winning command is received from the main controller 162. If a negative determination is made in either step S1301 or step S1302, this setting process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1302, winning order grasping processing is executed in step S1303. In the winning order grasping process, the number of winnings to the through gate 66 generated during the preparation mode and the winning order are grasped. If the number of winnings does not match the above-mentioned prescribed number (more specifically two) (more specifically, if the prescribed number has not been reached), a negative determination is made in step S1304, and the present setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the number of wins matches the above-mentioned prescribed number (specifically, two) (specifically, when the prescribed number is reached), the process proceeds to step S1305.

  In step S1305, it is determined whether or not the order set in step S1203 matches the actual order grasped in step S1303. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1305, that is, if the answer is correct in winning order, the process proceeds to step S1306. In step S1306, a state notification first setting process for executing state notification corresponding to the winning order correct answer is executed. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1305, that is, if the winning order is incorrect, the process proceeds to step S1307. In step S1307, the state notification second setting process for executing state notification corresponding to the winning order incorrect answer is executed. After executing the processing of step S1306 and step S1307, the state notification preparation completion flag is erased in step S1308, and this setting processing ends.

  Here, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 22, the timing of status notification set by the first / second setting processing for status notification will be described. About the timing of state notification, it differs according to various conditions such as presence / absence of teaching in winning order, jackpot type, winning / not winning order.

  More specifically, when the winning order is taught (probability change jackpot result) and the answer is correct in the winning order, the state notification is executed during the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, the background color of the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 changes to a color (red) corresponding to the high probability mode in a predetermined round (for example, the first round or the final round) in the opening / closing execution mode. It becomes. On the other hand, when the winning order is taught (probability jackpot result) and the winning order is incorrect, the number of games executed after the end of the high-frequency support mode is a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times). At this time, the background color (red) indicating that the lottery mode is the high probability mode is switched. In other words, the normal background color (blue) is selected until the number of game times executed after the end of the high frequency support mode reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times).

  Next, a case where the winning order is not taught will be described. If the answer is a probable jackpot result and the correct answer is given in the order of winning, the background color is switched to the color corresponding to the high-accuracy mode (red) in either the opening / closing execution mode or the high-frequency support mode end timing. Which of these two timings is used is determined by lottery. If it is a probable jackpot result and the winning order is incorrect, the lottery mode is the high probability mode at the timing when the number of games executed after the end of the high-frequency support mode reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times). Is switched to the background color (red). In other words, the normal background color (blue) is selected until the number of game times executed after the end of the high frequency support mode reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times).

  If the winning order is not taught and the result is a normal jackpot result and the correct answer is in winning order, the background color (red) indicating that the lottery mode is the high probability mode at the end of the high frequency support mode is switched to Is made. In other words, the normal background color (blue) is selected until the high-frequency support mode ends. When the winning order is not taught, and it is a normal jackpot result and the winning order is incorrect, the timing at which the number of games executed after the end of the high-frequency support mode reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50) Thus, the background color (red) indicating that the lottery mode is the high probability mode is switched. In other words, the normal background color (blue) is selected until the number of game times executed after the end of the high frequency support mode reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times).

  When the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, it is possible to advance the game while suppressing investment compared to the low-frequency support mode. Therefore, if the answer is correct in the winning order, at least the high-frequency support mode is notified before the end of the high-probability mode, so that the player may stop the game during the high-probability mode. Reduced. On the other hand, if the winning order is incorrect, whether or not the mode is the high probability mode is not clearly indicated until the game is advanced to some extent after the high frequency support mode is finished. In this way, by concealing the lottery mode, the expectation for the high probability mode can be favorably raised.

  In determining whether or not to continue the game, whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode or the low probability mode is an important determination index. Compared to the support mode, it becomes difficult to identify the lottery mode from the behavior of the gaming machine, so the player is more likely to pay attention to the status notification. Whether or not the status notification is possible depends on the player's operation, but the operation that triggers the status notification by associating with the transition from the preparation mode to the opening / closing execution mode (operation essential to the progress of the game) Can be preferably avoided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the function from being effectively utilized in suppressing monotonization of the game.

  According to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, when a jackpot result is obtained, the mode is not immediately shifted to the opening / closing execution mode (corresponding to the “special game state”), but first as a preliminary stage (“preparation”). Equivalent to “Status”). Then, when the number of winnings to the through gate 66 (corresponding to “predetermined pitching portion”) reaches a predetermined number in this preparation mode, the condition for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode is established. In the preparation mode, not only the winning numbers to the left and right through gates 66 but also the winning order is monitored, and the actual winning order matches the preset winning order corresponding to the notification. Will be executed in advance. In other words, when the number of games executed after the end of the high frequency support mode reaches 50 times, the game state is clearly indicated, but the game state is notified at an earlier timing. Become.

  If the game is stopped in a relatively advantageous state (high probability mode), the player would lose the profit that should have been originally obtained. In addition, when the game is relatively disadvantageous (low probability mode), there is a possibility that the investment will be increased by continuing the game. Under such circumstances, it is important to predict and grasp whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode or the low probability mode in order to advance the game advantageously. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, if the lottery mode is taught by correctly answering in order of winning through the through gate 66, the player can actively participate in the game to obtain the information ( Game balls). Thereby, it can suppress suitably that a game becomes monotonous. In particular, in a gaming machine of the type that shifts to the opening / closing execution mode via the preparation mode, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the subsequent development changes according to the winning order in the preparation mode in order to suppress monotonization of the game. .

  Here, as described above, in order to shift to the opening / closing execution mode, winnings to the through gates 66 are indispensable. By using these through gates 66 as targets for understanding the winning order, the through gates 66 in the progress of the game. It can be avoided that the above-described effect of suppressing monotonization is not satisfactorily exhibited due to the progress of the game while ignoring the winning suggestion.

  The number of winnings required for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode matches the number of winnings required for order comparison. For this reason, when aiming at the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, it is avoided that the number of winnings necessary for grasping the order is insufficient. In addition, since the number of winnings required for the transition to the opening / closing execution mode matches the number of winnings required for order comparison, it is possible to suitably suppress the fact that the contrast function of the winning order is a factor that delays the game unnecessarily. .

<Modification 1>
In the first embodiment, when shifting from the preparation mode to the opening / closing execution mode, the winning order to the left and right through gates 66 is set as the condition notification execution condition. It was set as the structure by which a status alert | report is performed at an earlier timing than the case where it becomes. In order to improve the degree of attention to the game when shifting from the preparation mode to the opening / closing execution mode, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration. In the present embodiment, the contents of the game executed in the preparation mode are different from those in the first embodiment. The difference will be described below with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. In this modification as well, status notification is executed by a predetermined timing after the end of the high-frequency support mode, but status notification executed before the end of the high-frequency support mode is distinguished as “prior notification”. To do.

  In this modification, the correct / incorrect answer is determined for the first winning destination, and the correct / incorrect answer is determined for the second winning destination. In other words, there is room for the above-described notification when the first winning prize is incorrect and the second winning prize is correct. And the generation | occurrence | production probability of the said alerting | reporting changes according to the number of correct answers.

  For example, when the winning order is taught in the preparatory mode started with the probability change jackpot result, if the number of correct answers of the winning destination is 2/2, the pre-notification is executed with a probability of 100%, and the winning destination If the positive number of times is 1/2, the previous notification is executed with a probability of 50%, and if the positive number of winning prizes is 0/2, the previous notification is not executed. Further, the execution timing of the prior notification may change depending on the number of correct answers of the winning destinations. Specifically, if the number of correct answers is 2/2, prior notification is executed during the opening / closing execution mode, and if the number of correct answers is ½, prior notification is executed during the opening / closing execution mode or when the high frequency support mode ends. The On the other hand, if the number of correct answers is 0/2, the status notification is executed at the timing when the number of games executed after the end of the high-frequency support mode reaches a predetermined number (50 times).

  Even if the winning order is not taught in the preparatory mode started with the probability change jackpot result, if the number of correct answers of the winning place is 2/2, the pre-notification is executed with a probability of 100%, and the winning place If the number of positives is ½, the previous notification is executed with a probability of 50%, and if the number of positive prizes is 0/2, the previous notification is not executed. If the number of correct answers is 2/2 or 1/2, prior notification is executed during the opening / closing execution mode or after the end of the high frequency support mode, and if the number of correct answers is 0/2, it is executed after the end of the high frequency support mode. The state notification is executed at the timing when the number of games reaches a predetermined number (50 times).

  Even if the winning order is not taught in the preparatory mode, which is usually triggered by the jackpot result, if the number of correct answers at the winning place is 2/2, the pre-notification is executed with a probability of 100%, and the winning place If the number of positives is ½, the previous notification is executed with a probability of 50%, and if the number of positive prizes is 0/2, the previous notification is not executed. If the number of correct answers is 2/2 or 1/2, prior notification is executed after the end of the high frequency support mode, and if the number of correct answers is 0/2, the number of games executed after the end of the high frequency support mode is a predetermined number of times. The state notification is executed at the timing of reaching (50 times).

  When determining the correct / incorrect answer according to the winning order, if the first selection is missed, the next selection is made halfway mechanically, and the game motivation may be reduced at once. In the first embodiment, a configuration in which such an inconvenience is suppressed by adopting a configuration in which a notification of correct / incorrect answer is executed when the number of winnings = a prescribed number is reached. On the other hand, according to the configuration shown in the present modification, even if the correct / incorrect answer is announced at each winning, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game motivation caused by it and to make the game monotonous during the preparation mode It is possible to more suitably exhibit the effect of suppressing the above.

  In the first modification, the number of correct answers at which the state notification execution probability is 100% is unified so as to be the same as the specified number. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a difference may be provided in the number of correct answers with an execution probability of 100% depending on the type of jackpot (A to D above).

<Modification 2>
In the first embodiment, the lottery mode is highly probable by combining the probability variation jackpot result and the normal jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode is common, and unifying the display mode in various effect devices such as the symbol display device 75. Although it is difficult to distinguish between the mode and the low-probability mode from the appearance, the present invention is not limited to this. It is sufficient if discrimination between the high probability mode and the low probability mode is difficult.

  For example, an operation mode in the opening / closing execution mode using a special hit result as a trigger, using a special hit result (2R correspondence) that does not affect the lottery mode and the support mode and a 2R probability variable big hit result corresponding to the low frequency support mode. It is also possible to share the operation mode of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 2R jackpot result corresponding to the low frequency support mode.

  In the case of such a configuration, as shown in the first embodiment, as the operation mode (winning mode) of the variable winning devices 64 and 65, the winning to the variable winning devices 64 and 65 is substantially performed. A special winning result is set by setting a high-frequency winning mode to be generated and a low-frequency winning mode in which a winning to the variable winning devices 64 and 65 does not substantially occur by setting the opening time shorter than the launching period of the game ball, etc. The opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 2R probability variation jackpot corresponding to the low-frequency support mode may be set as the low-frequency winning mode. This makes it less noticeable that the user has passed through the opening / closing execution mode, and the gaming state can be changed secretly.

<Second Embodiment> The latent notification is made according to the winning order in which the jackpot is won. In the first embodiment, the internal high is determined according to the winning order to the through gate 66 in the preparation mode before shifting to the opening / closing execution mode. It is configured to notify whether the mode is the probability mode or the low probability mode. In the present embodiment, although it is possible to perform the same notification as in the first embodiment, the winning order that is the trigger is not the preparation mode but the winning order in the opening / closing execution mode. This is one of the features. That is, the configuration is different from that of the first embodiment in that the winning order monitoring function is enabled during the opening / closing execution mode. Hereinafter, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24A, a state notification preparation process executed by the MPU 612 of the notification / production control device 610 according to the present embodiment will be described.

(Preparation process for status notification)
In the state notification preparation process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. If a positive determination is made in step S1401, the process proceeds to step S1402. In step S1402, it is determined whether or not the state notification condition has been satisfied. In this embodiment, the winning order is monitored during the round, and it is determined whether or not the answer is correct in the winning order in the previous round. If a negative determination is made in step S1401, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S1402, the preparation process is terminated as it is.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1402, the process proceeds to step S1403. In step S1403, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the interval period before a predetermined round (in the present embodiment, the third round, the seventh round, and the eleventh round). If a negative determination is made in step S1403, the present preparation process is terminated as it is. If a positive determination is made in step S1403, the process proceeds to step S1404.

  The types of jackpots are roughly divided into 4R jackpots, 8R jackpots, and 16R jackpots. In the case of 4R jackpots, the winning order is monitored only in the third round, and in the case of 8R jackpots, the third and seventh rounds are monitored. The winning order is monitored at, and in the case of 16R jackpot, the winning order is monitored in the third round, the seventh round, and the eleventh round (see the schematic diagram in FIG. 24B). In other words, it is differentiated so that the jackpot with more rounds to be executed has more opportunities to challenge in order of winning.

  If a positive determination is made in step S1403, the process proceeds to step S1404. In step S1404, a process of setting a winning order corresponding to the state notification is performed. In the present embodiment, “3 times” is set as the number of winnings to the through gate 66 to be monitored. There are a total of 8 patterns for the three winning orders. In the setting process of step S1404, it is determined which of these eight patterns is to be awarded in accordance with the status notification.

  In the present embodiment, the winning order corresponding to the state notification is determined (updated) for each interval period related to the monitoring of the winning order, but the winning order corresponding to the state notification determined first is opened and closed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration that is maintained until the end of the execution mode. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a new winning order (correct answer) is added in the winning order corresponding to the state notification determined first.

  After executing the determination process in step S1404, the winning order monitoring flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 614 in step S1405, and the preparation process is terminated. By storing the winning order monitoring flag, the winning order monitoring by the MPU 612 of the notification / production control device 610 is executed. Here, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 25, the state notification mode setting process executed by the MPU 612 of the notification / production control device 610 will be described.

(Setting process for status notification)
In the state notification setting process, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not it is during a predetermined round to be monitored in winning order. If a negative determination is made in step S1501, the setting process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, the process proceeds to step S1502.

  In step S1502, it is determined whether a round end condition (elapse of a predetermined period or occurrence of a predetermined number of winnings) is satisfied. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1502, the top entry winning number counter for grasping the number of winnings to the through gate 66 is reset in step S1503 and the winning order information stored in the RAM 614 is erased. Thereafter, in step S1504, the winning order monitoring flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 614 is deleted, and the processing for this setting is terminated.

  Returning to the description of step S1502, if a negative determination is made in step S1502, that is, if it is determined that the round end condition has not yet been established, the process proceeds to step S1505. In step S1505, it is determined whether or not the winning order monitoring flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 614. If a negative determination is made in step S1505, the present setting process is terminated as it is. If a positive determination is made in step S1505, the process proceeds to step S1506.

  In step S1506, it is determined whether or not a through gate winning command has been received from the main controller 162. If a negative determination is made in step S1506, the setting process is terminated as it is. If a positive determination is made in step S1506, the process proceeds to step S1507. In step S1507, a winning order grasping process is executed to grasp the winning order to the through gate 66. Thereafter, in step S1508, it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the through gate 66 has reached a specified number (“3” in the present embodiment). If a negative determination is made in step S1508, the processing for this setting is terminated as it is. If a positive determination is made in step S1508, the process proceeds to step S1509.

  In step S1509, it is determined whether or not the winning order grasped this time coincides with the winning order corresponding to the state notification set. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1509, the state notification first setting process (correction setting process) is executed in step S1510. If a negative determination is made in step S1509, the state is determined in step S1511. A second setting process for notification (setting process for incorrect answer) is executed. The details of the state notification mode are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the description is incorporated.

  After executing the processing of step S1510 or step S1511, the processing of step S1503 and step S1504 is executed, and the setting processing ends.

  In the opening / closing execution mode shown in the present embodiment, the number of winnings to the through gate 66 is not set as an opportunity to move to the next round. For this reason, the winning to the through gate 66 cannot always be generated “three times”. For example, as shown in FIG. 26 (a), when “right” → “left” → “right” is set as the winning order corresponding to the state notification, three wins are made from the start to the end of the third round. If it can be generated during this period, it will be the correct answer in the winning order. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 26 (b), when the number of winnings in the variable winning device 64 reaches the upper limit before the “three times” winning is generated in the through gate 66 during the third round. At that time, the third round ends. As described above, if the winning to the through gate 66 is not in time, the winning order is incorrect.

  In the first embodiment, the transition to the opening / closing execution mode (game progress) is temporarily stopped until the number of winnings to the through gate 66 reaches a specified number. For this reason, there is no interruption before the number of winnings to the through gate 66 reaches the specified number. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since it is necessary to generate a prize for the through gate 66 in the open / close execution mode (during round), the number of prizes received for the through gate 66 may reach a specified number in some cases. A censoring may occur. In view of such circumstances, unlike the first embodiment, the chances of correct answers in the order of winning are not necessarily limited to one time, but a case of multiple occurrences is provided. As a result, not only when the incorrect answer is made in the order of winning, but also when the winning to the through gate 66 is not in time, it is possible to make an expectation for the occurrence of another chance, and it is preferable to reduce the gaming motivation. Is suppressed.

  When the winning probability to the through gate 66 and the winning probability to the variable winning device 64 are compared, the latter is higher than the former, and the latter has an upper limit on the number of winnings. For this reason, it is necessary to generate three winnings for the through gate 66 before the number of winnings for the variable winning device 64 reaches the upper limit. As a result, an unprecedented game is realized.

<Modification 1>
In the second embodiment, the winning order to the through gate 66 during the round is monitored, but this may be changed and the winning order to the through gate 66 during the interval may be monitored. In this case, the interval period to be monitored in the winning order is extended so that the winning order is longer than the other interval periods not to be monitored (specifically, from 2 sec to 15 sec). And it is sufficient. The winning probability for the through gate 66 is about 1/10, and the firing period of the game ball is 0.6 sec. Therefore, in the original length of the interval period, it is insufficient for the player to strike the game ball and generate three winnings. Therefore, it is technical to extend the period only for the interval period to be monitored in the winning order while shortening the interval period to speed up the game progress in the interval period in which the winning order is not monitored. it makes sense.

  Note that the condition for shifting to the next round may be the number of winnings to the through gate 66 = a predetermined number. Thereby, it can suppress suitably that the function which determines the propriety of state alerting according to a prize order is not utilized well.

<Modification 2>
In the second embodiment, the state notification is performed when the correct answers are given in the order of winning. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The winning order may be monitored in a plurality of rounds, and the state notification probability may be changed according to the number of correct answers in the winning order. For example, when there are many correct answers in the winning order, the state notification probability may be set higher than in the case where the number of correct answers in the winning order is small. Further, a difference may be provided such that the timing of state notification becomes earlier as the number of correct answers in the winning order increases.

<Modification 3>
In the second embodiment, the state notification is determined according to the winning order to the through gate 66. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, among the magnitude relationships between the number of winnings to the left through gate 66L and the number of winnings to the right through gate 66R, the magnitude relationship corresponding to the status notification is set, and the number of winnings to each through gate 66 during the round is compared. Further, it may be configured to determine whether or not to perform the state notification depending on whether or not it matches the set magnitude relationship. Further, in making such a comparison, it is not always necessary that the winning destination is the left through gate 66L and the right through gate 66R. For example, the left general winning port 61L and the right general winning port 61R can be used.

  The technical idea shown in the third modification can also be applied to the first embodiment. In this case, the magnitude relationship of the number of winnings corresponding to the status notification is determined at the time of transition to the preparation mode, and the number of winnings to each through gate 66 in the preparation mode is ascertained / compared. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which status notification (pre-notification) is executed when there is.

<Modification 4>
As shown in Modification 3 above, in the configuration in which the number of winnings is compared for a plurality of pitching parts, and whether or not the status notification is executed based on the comparison result is determined, It is not always necessary to separately arrange the flow paths (left route / right route). It is also possible to arrange a plurality of target entrances in the same flow path. For example, for the right through gate 66R and the right general winning opening 61R arranged in the right route, the number of winnings to the right through gate 66R and the winning number to the right general winning opening 61R are compared. Is also possible.

<Third Embodiment> The latent notification is made in accordance with the winning order in the high-frequency support mode. In the first embodiment, the internal is determined in accordance with the winning order to the through gate 66 in the preparation mode before shifting to the opening / closing execution mode. Thus, the system is configured to notify whether the mode is the high probability mode or the low probability mode. In the present embodiment, although it is possible to perform the same notification as in the first embodiment, the winning order to be monitored as the opportunity is not the preparation mode but the winning order in the high frequency support mode This is one of the features. That is, the configuration is different from the first embodiment in that the winning order monitoring function is enabled during the high-frequency support mode. Hereinafter, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27, the state notification preparation process executed by the MPU 612 of the notification / production control device 610 according to the present embodiment will be described.

(Preparation process for status notification)
In the state notification preparation process, first, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the support mode by the electric accessory 71 is the high-frequency support mode. If a positive determination is made in step S1601, the process proceeds to step S1602. In step S1602, it is determined whether or not the state notification condition has been satisfied. In the present embodiment, the monitoring of the winning order is started at the timing when the number of games executed during the high-frequency support mode reaches a predetermined number (specifically, 30, 60, 90). It has a configuration. In step S1602, it is determined whether or not the correct answer is given in the order of winning in the previous monitoring. If a negative determination is made in step S1601, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S1602, the preparation process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1602, the process proceeds to step S1603. In step S1603, it is determined whether or not the number of games executed during the high frequency support mode is a predetermined number (specifically, 30 times, 60 times, and 90 times). If a negative determination is made in step S1603, the winning number counter for the through gate 66 is reset in step S1604 and the winning order information stored in the RAM 614 is cleared. Once monitoring of the winning order is started, if the game number is executed 30 times before the number of winnings to the through gate 66 reaches the specified number, the notification condition is not satisfied, and so on. Will be invalid.

  Here, under the high-frequency support mode, the game display speed is increased by reducing the display time of each game, but if there is no winning through the through gate, the lower operation is performed. The on-hold information relating to the incoming ball portion 63 becomes 0, and the traveling speed decreases. The number of games (30) that prescribes the winning monitoring period is larger than the product (12) of the storage upper limit number (4) of the hold information and the specified number (3). By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the games related to the winning order from being invalidated by playing 30 times before the number of winnings to the through gate 66 reaches the specified number.

  After executing the process of step S1604, in step S1605, a process of setting a winning order for status notification is performed. In the present embodiment, “3 times” is set as the number of winnings to the through gate 66 to be monitored. There are a total of 8 patterns for the three winning orders. In the setting process in step S1605, it is determined which of these eight patterns is to be awarded in accordance with the status notification.

  After executing the setting process in step S1605, the winning order monitoring flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 614 in step S1606, and the preparation process is terminated. By storing the winning order monitoring flag, the winning order monitoring by the MPU 612 of the notification / production control device 610 is executed.

  During the high frequency support mode, the progress of the game is faster than in the low frequency support mode. Thus, although progressing games one after another is advantageous in realizing speeding up of the progress of the game, there is a concern that the game will become monotonous as the game times proceed mechanically halfway. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, by providing an opportunity to acquire information on the state of the game in accordance with the winning order (left through gate 66L, right through gate 66R) of the game balls in the high frequency support mode A plurality of different games can be advanced in parallel under the high-frequency support mode, and the monotonization of the game can be suitably suppressed.

<Modification 1>
In the third embodiment, the order of entering is reset and reset according to the number of game times executed in the situation where the high-frequency support mode is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is not something. For example, the winning order may be reset and reset according to the number of times of support (the number of times of support lottery) by the electric accessory 71 executed in the situation of the high frequency support mode.

<Modification 2>
A game state in which the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode is used in combination, while the low frequency support mode is in progress (apparently the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode), but internally the high probability mode It may be possible to provide a gaming state in which it is impossible or difficult to identify. In this case, when the winning order is set according to the number of game times executed under the situation of the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, and when the answer is correct in the winning order under the situation It is also possible to make a configuration for notifying whether or not the mode is the high probability mode at that time.

<Fourth Embodiment> In the first embodiment, when the lottery mode is the high probability mode, the 8R normal jackpot result is obtained. Or it was set as the structure which transfers to low probability mode triggered by having become 4R normal jackpot result. That is, when shifting to the low probability mode, the configuration is such that the opening / closing execution mode is passed. In the present embodiment, a fall lottery from the high probability mode to the low probability mode is performed, and when a fall result is obtained, the mode is shifted to the low probability mode without going through the opening / closing execution mode. In addition to this difference, the configuration relating to status notification is also different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, after describing the basic configuration of the gaming machine in the present embodiment, the configuration relating to the state notification in the present embodiment will be described.

  In the various counter areas 604d of the main control unit 162, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the random number initial value counter CINI, the variation type counter CS, it is used for the falling lottery from the high probability mode. A falling random number counter C5 is provided (see the schematic diagram of FIG. 28).

  For example, the falling random number counter C5 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 599, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 599). The falling random number counter C5 is regularly updated, and the retained ball in the RAM 604 is the timing when the game ball wins the upper working ball entering part 62 (upper working hole 62a) or the lower working ball entering part 63 (lower working hole 63a). It is stored in the storage area 604b. More specifically, at the timing when a game ball is won in the upper working ball entering portion 62 (upper working port 62a), it is stored in the upper working ball holding portion Ra in the RAM 604, and the lower working ball entering portion 63 (lower operation). At the timing when a game ball wins in the mouth 63a), it is stored in the lower working ball entry holding area Rb of the RAM 604.

  The random number value that is the fall result is stored as a fall table (whether information group) in a fall table storage area as a fall information group storage means in the ROM 603. Here, the contents of the fall table will be described. As for the fall table, the table to be referenced is shared regardless of the gaming state such as the high probability mode / low probability mode or the high frequency support mode / low frequency support mode, but is limited to this. Instead, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the reference table is switched for each gaming state.

  In the lottery, the random number value (that is, the winning information) resulting in the fall is one “444”. That is, only “444” among the values of the falling random number counter C5 of “0 to 599” corresponds to the falling result. In the case of a fall result, the gaming state shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode (fall). When the value of the fall random number counter C5 is other than “444” during the low probability mode, the low probability mode is maintained, and when the fall random number counter C5 is other than “444” during the high probability mode. Is maintained in high probability mode. That is, in this embodiment, after shifting to the high probability mode, the high probability mode is maintained until a falling result is obtained in the falling lottery.

  Next, the fluctuation start process executed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 29 and 30.

(Variation start processing)
As shown in FIG. 29, in the variation start process, first, a falling lottery process is executed in step S1701. In the falling lottery process, it is determined with reference to the falling random number counter C5 and the falling table whether or not the condition for shifting to the low probability mode is satisfied. If it is a fall result, an affirmative determination is made in step S1702, and the setting process for fall in step S1703 is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 30, in the fall setting process, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1801, the setting process for the final fall ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1801, processing proceeds to step S1802. In step S1802, the high probability mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 604e of the RAM 604 is deleted. After executing the process of step S1802, in step S1803, the success / failure lottery table switching process is executed and the setting process for the final fall ends. By performing the success / failure lottery table switching process, the success / failure lottery table for the low probability mode is referred to in the subsequent success / failure lottery process.

  After executing the process of step S1703 or when making a negative determination in step S1702, the process proceeds to step S1704. In step S1704, the determination process is executed. In the success / failure determination process of step S1704, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode or the low probability mode. In the case of the high probability mode, with reference to the high probability mode success / failure table among the tables stored in the success / failure table storage area 603a, the information for the success / failure determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, It is determined whether or not the numerical information relating to the jackpot random number counter C1 matches the jackpot numerical information for high probability. In the case of the low probability mode, the numerical value applied to the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE by referring to the low probability mode success / failure table among the tables stored in the success / failure table storage area 603a. It is determined whether or not the information matches the low probability jackpot information.

  If the result of the success / failure determination in step S1704 results in a jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in step S1705 and the process proceeds to step S1706. In step S1706, a jackpot type determination process is executed, and in subsequent step S1707, a jackpot stop result setting process is performed in accordance with the jackpot result. On the other hand, if an incorrect result is obtained in step S1704, the determination is negative in step S1705 and the process proceeds to step S1708. In step S1708, a stop result setting process for removal is performed according to the result of removal. About each process of step S1707 and step S1708, since it is the same as that of each process of step S704 and step S705, description is used.

  After executing the process of step S1707 or step S1708, the process for setting the change display time is executed in step S1709, and the change start command and the type command are set in the subsequent step S1709. After that, in step S1711, the fluctuation display start process is executed, and the fluctuation start process ends. About each process of step S1709-S1711, since it is the same as that of each process of step S706-S708, description is used.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the falling lottery is executed every time the game times are repeated, and when the result of the falling is obtained, the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode. Even when such a fall occurs, it is difficult to identify the fact from information such as a variation display mode of symbols and a combination of stop symbols. That is, it is avoided that the player discriminates between the high probability mode and the low probability mode.

  Here, in the first embodiment, the winning order is set in response to the transition to the preparation mode. However, in the present embodiment, the winning order is set in response to the start of the game round. It is set as the structure which performs. Hereinafter, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31, processing (preparatory processing for status notification) relating to winning order setting executed by the MPU 612 of the notification / production control device 610 will be described.

(Preparation process for status notification)
In the state notification preparation process, it is first determined in step S1901 whether state notification is being performed or whether state notification is being prepared. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a state notification flag or a winning order monitoring flag, which will be described later, is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 614. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, the preparation process is terminated as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S1901, the process proceeds to step S1902.

  In step S1902, it is determined whether it is the start time of game times. If a negative determination is made in step S1902, the preparation process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1902, processing proceeds to step S1903. The notification / production control device 610 shown in the present embodiment has a function of storing an outline of the variation display mode in the previous game time.

  Here, a supplementary description will be given of the variation display mode of symbols displayed on the symbol display device 75 (display screen 75a). The symbol variation display mode executed on the display screen 75a is roughly divided into five categories: complete detachment, normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C. About each of these variable display modes, the variable display time is set to be different, and the outline of the variable display mode for each game time is grasped based on the information related to the variable display time given to the command from the main controller 162. It is possible. In the game times corresponding to the jackpot result, it is easy to select Super Reach C> Super Reach B> Super Reach A> Normal Reach B> Normal Reach A. In the game times corresponding to the missed result, complete miss> The structure is such that normal reach A> normal reach B> super reach A> super reach B> super reach C. In other words, the jackpot winning expectation degree (hereinafter also simply referred to as the expectation degree) is set higher as the variable display time becomes longer.

  In step S1903, the game information stored in the information recording area of the RAM 614 is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the super reach corresponding to the detachment result has been executed in the previous game round. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1903, the process advances to step S1904 to execute a state notification first lottery process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the previous game round that the superreach corresponding to the losing result is not executed, the process proceeds to step S1905, and the state notification second lottery process is executed.

  In the state notification first lottery process and the state notification second lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not the state notification winning order is set. The probability that the winning order for state notification is set (the probability of winning the state notification lottery) is higher in the first lottery process than in the second lottery process. Thereby, in this Embodiment, the setting of the winning order for state alerting is performed immediately after the super reach corresponding to the outlier result.

  After the lottery process in step S1904 or step S1905 is executed, it is determined in step S1906 whether or not the status notification lottery has been won. If a negative determination is made in step S1906, the preparation process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1906, the process proceeds to step S1907. In step S1907, a winning order corresponding to the state notification is set. Specifically, the winning order corresponding to the status notification is selected from the eight winning orders.

  After the winning order corresponding to the status notification is set, the winning order monitoring flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 614 in step S1908, and the preparation process is terminated. By storing the winning order monitoring flag, the game proceeds to the special game mode in which the state notification is performed by correctly answering in the winning order. In the MPU 612 of the notification / production control device 610, the state notification setting process is executed by shifting to the special game mode. Hereinafter, the state notification setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Setting process for status notification)
In the state notification setting process, first, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not the winning monitoring flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 614. If a negative determination is made in step S2001, the present setting process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, the process proceeds to step S2002. In step S2002, it is determined whether or not a through gate winning command is received from main controller 162. If a negative determination is made in step S2002, the present setting process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2002, the process proceeds to step S2003. In step S2003, a winning order grasping process is executed.

  After executing the process of step S2003, it is determined in step S2004 whether or not the number of winnings to the through gate 66 matches the specified number (“3” in the present embodiment). If a negative determination is made in step S2004, the setting process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2004, the process advances to step S2005 to determine whether the set winning order matches the actual winning order. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2005, the process proceeds to step S2006. In step S2006, it is determined whether or not the current lottery mode is the high probability mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2006, that is, if the correct answer is made in the winning order and the high probability mode is set, the process proceeds to step S2007.

  In step S2007, a state notification start process is executed. As a result, a message indicating that the high probability mode is in effect is displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. This display is continued until the game is over and the next game is started. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, it is unclear whether the correct answer / incorrect answer is given in the winning order.

  In this embodiment, a message prompting the player to win the through gate 66 on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 is displayed at the timing when the winning monitor flag is set. However, the winning actually occurs. There is a possibility that the game times will be straddled during the time between winning the prize and completing the prize. In this case, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode is in effect when the winning order finally matches. For this reason, even if it is the high probability mode at the timing when the display of the message is started, the possibility that the low probability mode is set at the timing when the winning order is actually matched cannot be denied. In such a case, status notification is avoided. In addition, when it is not possible to secure a sufficient period for performing the state notification, for example, when the correct answer is not given in the winning order before the confirmation display is started, the state notification is avoided.

  After performing the process of step S2007, if a negative determination is made in step S2005 or step S2006, the process proceeds to step S2008. In step S2008, the winning number counter of the through gate 66 is reset and the winning order information stored in the RAM 614 is erased.

  After executing the process of step S2008, the winning order monitoring flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 614 is deleted in step S2009, and the present setting process is terminated. The special game mode is canceled by erasing the winning order monitoring flag.

  Here, with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 33, the relationship between the flow of the game and the state notification will be supplementarily described.

  In the situation where the lottery mode is the high probability mode, it is determined by lottery whether or not to shift to the special game mode at the start of the game time next to the game time that is the result of losing. In this case, if the previous game times correspond to super reach and other cases (normal reach or complete disengagement), the former can move to special game mode. The nature is getting higher. Also, when the high probability mode and the low probability mode are compared, a difference is provided so that the former is more likely to shift to the special game mode than the latter.

  In a situation where it is not certain whether the mode is the high probability mode or the low probability mode, it is assumed that the game is performed while expecting the high probability mode. However, when it is informed that the result has been lost via the highly anticipated variable display mode (super reach) under such circumstances, the expectation for the high probability mode will drop at a stretch. . In other words, if the high probability mode would have been a big hit result, the player was given the impression that the reason for the disapproval result via the highly anticipated variable display mode was the low probability mode. Easy to give to. From such a situation, there is a concern that the notification of the detachment result in a highly expected variation display mode will trigger the game.

  In this regard, in the next game round in which the super reach corresponding to the losing result is executed during the high probability mode, the game mode is in the high probability mode if the special game mode is entered and the correct answer is given to the through gate 66 in the winning order. Is taught. Thereby, the fall of game willingness can be suppressed suitably.

  On the other hand, even when the super reach corresponding to the outage result is executed during the low probability mode, there is a possibility of shifting to the special game mode at the next game round. Here, if it is clearly indicated that the mode is the low probability mode, it can be a factor of reducing the game motivation. In this regard, in the present embodiment, whether or not the correct answers are given in the winning order is not clearly indicated. Even if the correct answers are given in the order of winning, the status notification is avoided unless the high probability mode is in effect. Therefore, when the status notification is not performed, it is difficult to identify whether it is out of winning order or not because of the high probability mode. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming motivation. In the special game mode, since it is necessary to launch a game ball aiming at the through gate 66, it is preferable for improving the operating rate of the gaming machine.

  Since the transition to the special game mode is made at the next game time instead of the game time at which the superreach corresponding to the losing result is executed, it is possible to favorably continue the game. Also, if the game mode is changed to the special game mode at the game times in which the super reach is executed, the expectation for the jackpot result is greatly reduced. Therefore, transitioning to the special game mode at the next game round has a technical significance of suppressing a decrease in the degree of attention to the game round.

<Modification 1>
In the fourth embodiment, the special game mode (the game mode in which the winning order is applied) is shifted to the special game mode mainly at the next game time in which the super reach corresponding to the outlier is executed. The transition condition is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to shift to the special game mode when the number of stored hold information reaches the upper limit. In addition, as shown in the third embodiment, the game mode may be shifted to the special game mode when the number of executed games reaches a predetermined number.

<Modification 2>
In the fourth embodiment, when the state notification execution period cannot be secured, the state notification is avoided. However, the state notification may be carried over to the next game round. In this case, it is preferable to reflect whether the next game time corresponds to the high probability mode or the low probability mode based on the result of the falling lottery of the next game time.

<Modification 3>
In the fourth embodiment, when the state notification execution condition is satisfied (correct answer in winning order), the state notification is immediately executed. However, the state notification timing may be delayed. It is. For example, when the condition notification execution condition is satisfied, the condition notification may be executed when the number of games executed after the execution condition is satisfied reaches a preset number. In this case, it is preferable to reflect whether the next game time corresponds to the high probability mode or the low probability mode based on the result of the falling lottery of the game time in which the state notification is executed.

  In addition, it is good also as a structure which makes a player select in which game times state notification is performed. For example, it is good also as a structure selected from the various candidates of the said game times, after 10 game times, after 20 game times, after 30 game times.

<Modification 4>
In the fourth embodiment, a high-accuracy state in which the probability of transition to the special game mode is high at the game time next to the game time executed in a predetermined variation display mode (super reach corresponding to the outlier result) Although it comprised so that it may become, it is not limited to this. For example, after the game times executed in a predetermined variation display mode, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the high-accuracy state is continued until a preset game number or period elapses.

<Fifth Embodiment> The notification execution condition varies depending on the number of reserved electric roles. In each of the above embodiments, the game state is notified when the correct answer is given to the through gate 66 in the order of winning. In the present embodiment, one of the features is that the notification execution condition is changed depending on the number of the electric utility holds. Hereinafter, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 34, a characteristic configuration of the present embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the first embodiment.

  As already described, the electric accessory 71 is configured to be switched from the closed state to the open state when winning a lottery triggered by winning through the through gate 66. In the game times in which the variation display mode is highly likely to be a big hit result, an act of stopping the release of the game ball is performed in order to suppress the release of the useless game ball (to suppress the investment). It is not preferable that such an action is frequently performed because it causes a reduction in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

  Here, in this Embodiment, it is comprised so that the number of winning orders corresponding to state alerting | reporting may increase, when the number of electric power reservations memorize | stored at the time of transfering to preparation mode increases. Specifically, the winning order that is the correct answer when the number of retained power roles is “0” to “2” is “1/4”, and the correct answer when the number of retained power roles is “3”. The winning order is “2/4”, and when the number of electrified holds is “4”, the winning order that is the correct answer is “4/4”. In other words, earning an electric power hold until the transition to the preparation mode (for example, during super reach) and setting the number to “3” or “4” reduces the correct hurdle in the winning order.

  If it can be grasped at an early timing whether or not it is in the high-probability mode internally, it will be advantageous in estimating the timing of ending the game. Therefore, the subsequent game can be advantageously advanced by earning the electric role hold before shifting to the preparation mode. Thereby, the subject which concerns on the operation rate mentioned above can be solved suitably.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the lower working ball entering portion 63 is more advantageous to the player for the allocation when determining the type of jackpot between the upper working ball entering portion 62 and the lower working ball entering portion 63. Differentiated to be. The entry to the lower operation entry portion 63 depends on the movement of the electric accessory 71. In order to open the electric accessory 71, winning through the through gate 66 is essential. If the possibility of a jackpot result is high, the lottery based on winning in the relatively unfavorable upper action pitching unit 62 will be continued immediately after the opening / closing execution mode is completed by accumulating the electric power suspension. It is possible to suppress the game progress and make it advantageous for the player. As described above, by reducing the chances of winning the winning through the through gate 66, it is possible to suitably suppress the player from being reluctant to secure the electric role reservation.

  In the case where the number of pending electric roles is “4”, which is the upper limit, even if a winning to the through gate 66 occurs, no new retained electric role is stored. However, in the case where the number of the pending electric roles has reached the upper limit, the status notification is fixed regardless of the winning order. This makes it difficult to generate a situation in which the launch of a game ball is refrained from concern about the generation of a useless ball.

<Modification 1>
In the fifth embodiment, the configuration is such that, when the number of electrification holds has reached the upper limit, the winning order corresponding to the state notification is increased, and the execution condition is satisfied in any winning order. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the case where the number of pending electronic roles has reached the upper limit, instead of increasing the winning order corresponding to the state notification, it is also possible to teach the set winning order corresponding to the state notification. . In addition, in order to provide a difference so that the advantage is increased by increasing the number of held electric roles, it is possible to increase the probability of teaching in order of winning according to the number of retained electric roles. .

<Modification 2>
In the fifth embodiment, the number of reserved electric roles is referred to when the winning order is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the configuration in which the winning order is determined by allowing the through gate 66 to win a plurality of times, the winning order from the middle is instructed when the number of pending electric roles reaches the upper limit before the winning order is determined. It is good also as a structure. For example, in the configuration in which the winning order is determined by winning through the through gate 66 three times, the number of the pending electric power reaches the upper limit at the timing before winning the second ball and correctly answering the first ball In this case, the remaining (second and third) winning destinations (in order of winning) may be taught.

<Sixth Embodiment> Round allocation lottery according to winning order In the first embodiment, the lottery mode is notified when the correct answer is given in winning order. In the present embodiment, when the correct answer is in the winning order, a difference is provided so that the game in the opening / closing execution mode is advantageous to the player compared to the case where the correct answer is not in the winning order. One. In addition, adjusting the launch destination of the game ball to its own image requires a certain degree of familiarity and skill. For this reason, such adjustment itself may become severe for a player who is not used to the game. Therefore, in the present embodiment, measures are taken in view of such circumstances. In the following, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 35, the preparation mode processing in the present embodiment will be described.

(Preparation mode processing)
In the preparation mode process, first, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not a winning to the through gate 66 has occurred based on a command from the main controller 162. If a negative determination is made in step S2101, the preparation mode processing is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2101, the process proceeds to step S2102.

  In step S2102, the winning number counter for the through gate 66 provided in the various counter areas 604d of the RAM 604 is updated. After executing the update process in step S2102, it is determined in step S2103 whether or not the current winning is the first winning. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, it is identified whether the current winning place is the left through gate 66L or the right through gate 66R.

  If the current winning place is the left through gate 66L, an affirmative decision is made in step S2104 and the flow proceeds to step S2105. In step S2105, “10” is set to the round counter RC. That is, when one ball is won in the left through gate 66L, the opening / closing execution mode is 10 rounds. On the other hand, if the current winning place is the right through gate 66R, the process proceeds to step S2106, and the winning order setting process corresponding to 16 rounds is executed. In the following description, “16 rounds” is also referred to as “16R”, “8 rounds” as “8R”, and “4 rounds” as “4R”.

  In the winning order setting process corresponding to 16R, the right through gate 66R → right through gate 66R, right through gate 66R → left through gate 66L, left through gate 66L → right through gate 66R, left through gate 66L → left through gate 66L. Of the four winning orders, a winning order (correct answer) corresponding to the current 16R is set.

  As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 36A, the winning order to be set is associated with the jackpot type. In the present embodiment, probability variation jackpot results A to D are provided as probability variation jackpot results, and normal jackpot results A to D are provided as normal jackpot results. In the case of jackpot result A, all winning orders correspond to 16R. For this reason, it shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to 16R, regardless of the winning order. On the other hand, in the case of the jackpot result B, three of the four winning orders correspond to 16R (one corresponds to 4R). For this reason, the probability of shifting to the 16R-compatible opening / closing execution mode is 3/4 and the probability of shifting to the 4R-compatible opening / closing execution mode is 1/4. In the case of the jackpot result C, two of the four winning orders correspond to 16R (two correspond to 4R). For this reason, the probability of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to 16R is 2/4, and the probability of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to 4R is 2/4. In the case of the jackpot result D, one of the four winning orders corresponds to 16R (three correspond to 4R). For this reason, the probability of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to 16R is 1/4 and the probability of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to 4R is 3/4. In this way, there is a difference in the correct answer probability in the winning order depending on the type of jackpot.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot result based on the winning to the upper working ball entering portion 62 and the jackpot result based on the winning to the lower working ball entering portion 63 are compared, the former is more The latter game is differentiated from the latter so that it is advantageous to the player. Specifically, when the jackpot result based on the winning to the lower operating ball entering portion 63 is greater than the case where the jackpot result based on the winning to the upper working ball entering portion 62 is reached, after the opening / closing execution mode ends. The probability that the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode and the number of continuations of the high-frequency support mode are preferentially treated. Specifically, in the jackpot result based on the winning to the upper action ball entry portion 62, the jackpot result A <jackpot result B <jackpot result C <jackpot result D is easy to be sorted in order, and to the lower action ball entry portion 63 In the jackpot result based on the winnings, the jackpot result D <the jackpot result C <the jackpot result B <the jackpot result A is easily sorted.

  After executing the setting process of step S2106, the process proceeds to step S2107. In step S2107, processing for shifting to the lottery mode for the number of rounds is performed. Specifically, a round number lottery mode flag is set in various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604. After executing the processing of step S2107, the preparation mode processing is terminated.

  Returning to the description of step S2103, if a negative determination is made in step S2103, that is, if it is not the first prize but the second or later prize, the process proceeds to step S2108. In step S2108, it is determined by referring to the round number lottery mode flag area in the various flag storage areas 604e whether or not it is in the round number lottery mode. If a positive determination is made in step S2108, the process proceeds to step S2109.

  In step S2109, winning order grasping processing is performed. In the subsequent step S2110, it is determined by referring to the updated winning number counter whether or not the winning number is equal to the prescribed number (“3” in the present embodiment). If a negative determination is made in step S2110, the preparation mode process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2110, the process proceeds to step S2111. In step S2111, it is determined whether or not the actual winning order matches the predetermined winning order. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2111, that is, if the correct answer is made in the order of winning, “16” is set in the round counter RC. As a result, the opening / closing execution mode corresponds to 16R. If a negative determination is made in step S2111, that is, if the answer is incorrect in the winning order, “4” is set in the round counter RC. As a result, the opening / closing execution mode corresponds to 4R. After executing the round setting process in step S2112 or step S2113, the preparation mode process is terminated after executing the opening / closing execution mode transition process in step S2114.

  Returning to the description of step S2108, if a negative determination is made in step S2108, that is, if the first winning destination is the left through gate 66L and the number of rounds has already been determined, the process proceeds to step S2115. In step S2115, the winning number counter is referred to and it is determined whether or not the winning number to the through gate 66 matches the specified number (“3” in the present embodiment). If a negative determination is made in step S2115, the preparation mode processing is terminated after executing the opening / closing execution mode transition processing in step S2114.

  Here, the flow of the game will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG.

(Game flow)
If the winning lottery result based on winning to the operation pitching units 62, 63 results in a big win, the system does not immediately shift to the opening / closing execution mode but shifts to the opening / closing execution mode via the preparation mode; Become. The number of rounds in the open / close execution mode is not fixed (except for some) when the jackpot result is reached, and is determined by the game in the preparation mode.

  Specifically, the condition for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode is established when the number of winnings to the through gate 66 (corresponding to the “operation gate”) becomes “3” during the preparation mode.

  The manner of determining the number of rounds changes according to the winning place when the three winnings occur. Specifically, when the first winning destination is the left through gate 66L, the number of rounds in the open / close execution mode at that time is 10R. On the other hand, when the first winning destination is the right through gate 66R, the number of rounds in the opening / closing execution mode is distributed according to the subsequent two winning destinations (in order of winning).

  There are four winning orders for the left through gate 66L and the right through gate 66R as described above. These four winning orders are assigned in advance to those corresponding to 16R and those corresponding to 4R. When the winning order corresponds to 16R (that is, when the answer is correct in winning order), the opening / closing execution mode is set. The number of rounds is 16R. On the other hand, when the winning order corresponding to 4R is reached (that is, when the answer is incorrect in the winning order), the round number in the opening / closing execution mode is 4R.

  When the number of rounds is determined by the number of winnings to the through gate 66 being “3”, the condition for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode is satisfied at the same time, and the opening / closing execution mode is started immediately thereafter.

  In this way, if the number of rounds varies depending on the winning destination to the through gate 66 that triggers the start of the opening / closing execution mode, the monotonization of the game can be suppressed, and the attention to the game can be improved. Depending on the situation, the player can select whether to win a lot of balls even if he takes risks, or to avoid a game so that he can get a stable ball without risk. Thus, the range of correspondence is expanded by adopting a configuration in which the game can be advanced in accordance with the player's preference.

  When the first winning destination is the right through gate 66R, the privilege obtained by the subsequent two winning destinations (in order of winning) changes. In this way, by adding new game play in the preparation mode before shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, monotonization of the game can be suitably suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, in particular, the lower working ball entering portion 63 is more advantageous for the player in determining the type of jackpot between the upper working ball entering portion 62 and the lower working ball entering portion 63. Is so differentiated. The entry to the lower operation entry portion 63 depends on the movement of the electric accessory 71. In order to open the electric accessory 71, winning through the through gate 66 is essential. If the possibility of a jackpot result is high, the lottery based on winning in the relatively unfavorable upper action pitching unit 62 will be continued immediately after the opening / closing execution mode is completed by accumulating the electric power suspension. It is possible to suppress the game progress and make it advantageous for the player. As described above, by reducing the chances of winning the winning through the through gate 66, it is possible to suitably suppress the player from being reluctant to secure the electric role reservation.

<Modification 1>
In the sixth embodiment, the first winning place determines whether or not to distribute the number of rounds according to the winning order. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is possible to eliminate the selection and to distribute the number of rounds according to all three winning destinations (in order of winning).

<Modification 2>
In the sixth embodiment, the number of rounds in the opening / closing execution mode is changed depending on the presence / absence of correct answers in the winning order. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If the correct answer is in the order of winning, if the subsequent development is more advantageous to the player than if the answer is incorrect in the order of winning, the difference in the degree of advantage is arbitrary. For example, the lottery mode (high probability mode / low probability mode) after completion of the opening / closing execution mode may be switched depending on the presence / absence of the correct answer in the winning order, or the support mode ( (High frequency support mode / low frequency support mode) may be switched.

<Modification 3>
In the sixth embodiment, the total number of winnings related to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is unified to “3”, but it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the total number of winnings is changed depending on the type of jackpot. If the correct answer rate is changed according to the change in the total number of winnings, monotonization of the game can be more suitably suppressed.

<Seventh Embodiment> Through Gate and General Winning Port In each of the above embodiments, when the specified number of winnings are generated in the through gate 66, the operation proceeds to the opening / closing execution mode and the through gate 66 is entered. The subsequent game flow or the like changes depending on whether or not the correct answer is given in the winning order. In the present embodiment, one of the features is that the flow of subsequent games changes depending on the relationship between winning in the through gate 66 and winning in the general winning opening 61. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 4, FIG. 37, and FIG. 38, a characteristic configuration in the present embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the sixth embodiment. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the preparation mode processing executed by the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162, FIG. 38 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a prescribed number set for each jackpot result, and FIG. 38 (b) is a game It is the schematic which shows a flow.

  First, with reference to FIG. 4, a supplementary description will be given of the configuration of the game board 60. As described above, the variable display unit 67 is disposed in the center of the game board 60, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE is divided into the left route and the right route by the variable display unit 67. ing.

  In the left route, a left through gate 66L is disposed on the side of the variable display unit 67 and in a portion where the lateral width of the flow-down path is reduced. A plurality of left general prize winning openings 61L are arranged at a portion downstream of the left through gate 66L. In other words, the left through gate 66L is arranged on the path through which the game ball flows down to the left general winning opening 61L. In the right route, a right through gate 66R is disposed on the side of the variable display unit 67 where the lateral width of the flow path is reduced. A right general winning opening 61R is disposed at a portion downstream of the right through gate 66R. In other words, the right through gate 66R is arranged on the path through which the game ball flows down to the right general prize winning opening 61R.

  Although the left route and the right route are joined below the variable display unit 67, it is difficult for the game ball flowing down the left route to win the right general winning port 61R as compared to the left general winning port 61L. Thus, it is difficult for the game ball flowing down the right route to win the left general winning opening 61L as compared to the right general winning opening 61R.

  When game balls are fired toward the left route, the game balls may win not only the left through gate 66L but also the left general winning opening 61L. Further, when game balls are fired toward the right route, the game balls may win not only the right through gate 66R but also the right general winning opening 61R. However, when comparing the winning probability to the left through gate 66L and the winning probability to the right through gate 66R, the latter is lower than the former. Further, when the winning probability to the right through gate 66R and the winning probability to the right general winning opening 61R are compared, the latter is lower than the former.

  More specifically, the winning probabilities for the left through gate 66L and the right through gate 66R are both 1/10, while the winning probabilities for the left general winning opening 61L are about 1/30 in total. The winning probability for the right general winning opening 61R is about 1/50.

  During the preparation mode before the opening / closing execution mode, the number of rounds in the opening / closing execution mode is determined using such a difference in winning probability. Specifically, when a game ball is fired to the left route (left through gate 66L), the winning to the left general winning opening 61L occurs before the number of winnings to the left through gate 66L becomes “3”. As a result, the number of rounds becomes “10”, and the number of rounds becomes “4” when the number of winnings to the left through gate 66L becomes “3” before the winning to the left general winning opening 61L occurs. . On the other hand, when a game ball is fired to the right route (right through gate 66R), the winning to the right general winning opening 61R occurs before the number of winnings to the right through gate 66R becomes “3”. As a result, the number of rounds becomes “16”, and the number of rounds becomes “4” when the number of winnings to the right through gate 66R becomes “3” before the winning to the right general winning opening 61R occurs. .

  During the preparation mode, the probability of winning the right general winning opening 61R aiming at the right route is lower than the probability of winning the left general winning opening 61L aiming at the left route. That is, the player can select whether to aim at a relatively large privilege with a relatively large risk, or to aim at a relatively small privilege with a relatively small risk. The number of rounds in the opening / closing execution mode is determined according to the winning mode in the preparation mode. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 37, the process for determining the number of rounds (preparation mode process) executed during the preparation mode will be described.

(Preparation mode processing)
In the preparation mode process, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds has been determined. If a negative determination is made in step S2201, the process proceeds to step S2202. In step S2202, it is determined whether or not a winning to the right general winning opening 61R has occurred. If a positive determination is made in step S2202, the process proceeds to step S2203. In step S2203, “16” is set to the round counter RC. That is, when a winning is made to the right general winning opening 61R, the number of rounds in the opening / closing execution mode is “16”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2202, the process proceeds to step S2204. In step S2204, it is determined whether or not a winning to the left general winning opening 61L has occurred. If a positive determination is made in step S2204, the process proceeds to step S2205. In step S2205, “10” is set in the round counter RC.

  After performing the setting process of step S2203 and step S2205, when an affirmative determination is made at step S2201, when a negative determination is made at step S2204, the process proceeds to step S2206. In step S2206, it is determined whether or not a winning for the through gate 66 has occurred. If a negative determination is made in step S2206, the preparation mode processing is terminated as it is. If a positive determination is made in step S2206, the process proceeds to step S2207.

  In step S2207, the winning counter for the through gate 66 provided in the various counter areas 604d of the RAM 604 is updated. As already described, the winning number counter is a counter for the main controller 162 to grasp the number of winnings to the through gate 66 during the preparation mode. After executing the update process of step S2207, the process proceeds to step S2208.

  In step S2208, it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the through gate 66 has reached a specified number (“3” in the present embodiment). If a negative determination is made in step S2208, the preparation mode process is terminated as it is. If a positive determination is made in step S2208, the process proceeds to step S2209. In step S2209, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds is fixed in the current preparation mode. If the setting processes in step S2203 and step S2204 are executed in advance, a negative determination is made in step S2209, the opening / closing execution mode transition process is executed in step S2211, and the preparation mode process ends. To do.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2209, that is, if the number of winnings to the through gate 66 first reaches the specified number without generating a winning in the general winning opening 61 during the preparation mode, in step S2210. Set “4” to the round counter RC. As a result, the number of rounds executed in the opening / closing execution mode to be shifted later becomes “4”. After executing the setting process of step S2210, after performing the opening / closing execution mode transition process in step S2211, the preparation mode process ends.

  Here, the flow of the game will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. When winning the jackpot, the opening / closing execution mode is not started immediately, but shifts to the preparation mode as an opportunity. In the preparation mode, a message prompting the user to select a right route that is a high risk / high return and a left route that is a low risk / low return is displayed on the symbol display device 75. When the game ball is launched by the player aiming at the left route or the right route, the number of rounds in the opening / closing execution mode is determined according to the winning destination.

  Specifically, the number of rounds is “16” when a winning is made to the right general winning opening 61R before the number of winnings to the through gate 66 reaches a specified number (“3” in the present embodiment). Thus, the number of rounds is “10” when a winning is made to the left general winning opening 61L, and the number of rounds is “4” when no winning is generated for any of the general winning openings 61.

  For the left route that is a low risk low return, the winning probability to the left through gate 66L is 1/10, and the winning probability to the left general winning opening 61L is 1/30. For this reason, there is a possibility that a winning to the left general winning opening 61L will occur before the number of winnings to the left through gate 66L reaches “3”, that is, a possibility that the number of rounds will be “10” is about 50%. . On the other hand, for the right route having a high risk and a high return, the winning probability to the right through gate 66R is 1/10, and the winning probability to the right general winning opening 61R is 1/50. . For this reason, the possibility of the number of rounds being “16” is approximately 37%.

  In this way, if the configuration is such that there is a difference in the benefits obtained depending on whether the number of winnings to the through gate 66 reaches the specified number early or whether the winning to the general winning opening occurs early. A novel game can be realized. Thereby, it can contribute to the improvement of the attention degree to a game.

  In addition, since the shift to the opening / closing execution mode is confirmed by winning the through gate 66, excessive investment occurs even if the game ball is continuously launched aiming at the general winning opening 61 where winning is less likely to occur. It can suppress suitably.

<Modification 1>
In the seventh embodiment, the specified number is unified to “3”, but the specified number may be changed depending on the type of jackpot. For example, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 38B, when the jackpot result is A, the specified number is “3”, when the jackpot result is B, the specified number is “4” and the jackpot result is C. In the case where the specified number is “5” and the jackpot result D is changed so that the specified number becomes “6”, the function of suppressing the monotony of the game can be further preferably enhanced.

<Modification 2>
In the seventh embodiment, the configuration is such that the game ball flowing down the right route can win the left general winning slot 61L and the game ball flowing down the left route can win the right general winning slot 61R. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which winning of the game ball flowing down the right route to the left general winning opening 61L is avoided and winning of the game ball flowing down the left route to the right general winning port 61R is avoided.

<Eighth Embodiment> Through Gate and General Winning Port Set as Operation Gate In each of the above embodiments, the through gate 66 is set as an “operation gate” that triggers the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. In the present embodiment, the through gate 66 (specifically, the right through gate 66R) and the left general winning opening 61L are set as “actuating gates”. In accordance with this, the transition condition to the opening / closing execution mode and the manner of determining the number of rounds in the preparation mode are characteristic. Hereinafter, processing (preparation mode processing) executed when the number of rounds is determined by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the preparation mode process, first, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not a winning for the left general winning opening 61L has occurred. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2310, “16” is set in the round counter RC in step S2302. Thereafter, after executing the opening / closing execution mode transition process in step S2305, the preparation mode process is terminated. That is, when a winning to the left general winning opening 61L occurs during the preparation mode, the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to 16R.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2301, the process proceeds to step S2303. In step S2303, it is determined whether or not a winning to the right through gate 66R has occurred. If a negative determination is made in step S2303, that is, if no winning has occurred in either the left general winning opening 61L or the right general winning opening 61R as the “actuation gate”, the processing for the preparation mode is terminated as it is. To do.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2303, the process proceeds to step S2304, and “15” is set in the round counter RC in step S2304. Thereafter, after executing the opening / closing execution mode transition process in step S2305, the preparation mode process is terminated.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 39B, when a game ball is launched aiming at the right route, the winning probability to the right through gate 66R becomes about 1/10. In other words, a winning to the through gate 66R is generated by firing approximately 10 game balls. On the other hand, when a game ball is launched aiming at the left route, the winning probability to the left general winning opening 61L is about 1/100. In other words, by winning approximately 100 game balls, winning to the left general winning opening 61L occurs.

  Compared to aiming for the right route, the game ball (investment) required before the opening / closing execution mode starts increases when the left route is aimed. However, when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode triggered by winning the left general winning opening 61L, the number of rounds is “1” more than when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode triggered by winning the right through gate 66R. Further, when a winning is made to the left general winning opening 61L, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. By adjusting the relationship between investment and return in this way, it is devised so that there is no difference in substantial advantage regardless of whether the right route or the left route is aimed.

  According to the gaming machine shown in the present embodiment, a difference occurs in the game progress when the player selects the launch destination of the game ball according to his / her preference. Thereby, the monotonization of a game can be suppressed suitably.

<Modification 1>
In the eighth embodiment, the right through gate 66R is set as an “actuating gate”, but instead, the right general winning opening 61R can be an “actuating gate”. In the case of such a configuration, the winning probability for the right general winning opening 61R is set to be higher than the winning probability for the left general winning opening 61L, and the advantages of the left route and the right route are aligned. It is preferable that

<Ninth Embodiment> Notification of the order of entering the ball according to the winning symbol In the present embodiment, the configuration relating to the notification of the winning order is characteristic. Hereinafter, with reference to the schematic diagrams of FIGS. 40A and 40B, the characteristic configuration of the present embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 40 (a), there is a difference in the notification mode of winning order depending on the type of the jackpot result. For example, in the 8R probability variation jackpot result, four types of 8R probability variation jackpot result A to 8R probability variation jackpot result D are provided. In the case of the 8R probability variation jackpot result A and the 8R probability variation jackpot result B, neither the first winning destination nor the second winning destination is subject to notification. On the other hand, in the case of the 8R probability variation jackpot result C, the first winning destination is notified, and in the case of the 8R probability variation jackpot result D, both the first and second winning destinations are notified. It is configured to be a target.

  That is, in the case of the 8R probability variation jackpot result A and the 8R probability variation jackpot result B, the winning order is not notified (teaching), and in the case of the 8R probability variation jackpot result C, the first winning order is notified (teaching). ), The winning order that is the correct answer is substantially narrowed down to half (1/2), and in the case of the 8R probability variation jackpot result D, all winning orders are notified (teached) and an operation error is made. Unless you do, the correct answer rate in the winning order will be 100%.

  Rather than letting the player select all winning orders at all times, a configuration that reduces the number of choices by informing (teaching) a part of the winning orders is suitable for the occurrence of inconveniences such that the winning order is semi-mechanically selected. Can be suppressed.

  Particularly in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40 (b), when the probability variation jackpot result is obtained, the notification (teaching) is more likely to occur than when the normal jackpot result is achieved. As a result, even if the wrong answer is given in the order of winning, the expectation that it is a promising big hit at the time when the notification (teaching) occurs can be increased, and the notification function shown in the present embodiment The degree of attention to the game can be preferably improved.

  Even when the notification (teaching) does not occur, there is still room for a probabilistic big hit result, so that the absence of notification (teaching) can be suitably suppressed from reducing the game motivation. .

<Tenth Embodiment> Changing the Firing Cycle When a game ball is launched into the game area PE, the strength depends on the amount of rotation of the game ball launch handle 41 (specifically, a ring member). Since the relationship between the rotation operation amount and the launch destination is not clearly shown, there is a concern that the operation becomes difficult when the game ball is launched at the target destination. Usually, the launch period of the game ball is set short so that the progress of the game can be performed to some extent. However, if it becomes necessary to divide the game balls as shown in the above-mentioned embodiments while maintaining such a launch cycle, the game balls are launched to a route different from the original intention. There is a possibility that. If a game ball that has been accidentally fired does not win the “actuation gate” etc., the game ball will still win the “action gate” etc., which will reduce the player's willingness to play. obtain.

  One of the features of the present embodiment is that measures are taken in consideration of such circumstances. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40 (c), in the preparation mode, the firing cycle is extended so that the firing cycle of the game ball is shorter than in the non-preparation mode. Specifically, the game ball firing cycle is 0.6 sec in other than the preparation mode, while the game ball firing cycle is extended to 1.2 sec during the preparation mode.

  The time required for the game ball fired from the game ball launching mechanism 110 to reach the through gate 66 that is the “operation gate” is about 1 sec, and when the firing cycle is 0.6 sec, Before the game ball launched from the ball launching mechanism 110 reaches the through gate 66, the next game ball is launched. In this case, even if it is attempted to change the rotation operation amount while looking at the launch destination, there is a high possibility that the change will not be in time. Also, when one game ball is launched to avoid the next game ball, the game ball reaching the game area PE is visually captured and then released from the game ball launch handle 41. Or a fire stop switch is assumed to be operated. Therefore, if the firing cycle is extended as described above, there is room for performing these operations, and it is possible to prevent the game ball from being accidentally fired.

  In this way, by extending the game ball launch cycle in situations where the launch destination route can be changed (preparation mode, etc.), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience that the player cannot select the game ball launch destination well. It becomes possible. Therefore, the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game shown in the above embodiments can be suitably exhibited.

<Modification 1>
When selecting the launch destination of a game ball, a left-handed button for launching a game ball toward the left route and a left-handed button for launching a game ball toward the right route are provided along with the player's operation. It is also possible. It may be configured to switch so that these two operation buttons become effective when a situation in which a winning order selection is necessary (for example, a preparation mode).

<Modification 2>
In the tenth embodiment, by extending the firing period, the chance that the game ball is accidentally fired is reduced. However, in order to suppress erroneous launch of the game ball, the following structure is adopted. Is also possible. That is, when one game ball is fired, it is preferable that the launch of the game ball be restricted until the player's hand once leaves the game ball launch handle 41. For example, when shifting to the preparation mode, it is possible to switch from the continuous launch mode in which the launch restriction is not performed to the launch restriction mode in which the launch restriction is performed.

<Eleventh Embodiment> Predominant occurrence of hold notice effect In the present embodiment, when a plurality of hold information is stored, before the game times related to the hold information are started (other game times) Is being executed), the effect related to the hold information (hold notice effect) is executed. By executing such a hold notice effect and encouraging attention to a game time other than the game time being executed (subsequent), effects such as an improvement in the degree of attention to the game can be expected. In the present embodiment, in particular, one of the features is that the execution mode of the hold notice effect changes according to the game situation. In the following, a process that is a premise of the hold notice effect will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 41 to 43, and then a configuration related to a change in the execution mode of the hold notice effect will be described.

(Information acquisition process)
As shown in FIG. 41, in the information acquisition process, first, in step S2401, the number N of starting reserved balls stored in the reserved number storage area FE of the reserved ball storage area 604b, more specifically, the upper working ball entering unit 62 and the lower side It is determined whether or not the number N of start-reserved balls related to the activated ball entering part that triggered the information acquisition process is less than the upper limit (“4” in the present embodiment). If the start hold storage number N is the upper limit value, the information acquisition process is terminated as it is. If the start hold storage number N is less than the upper limit value, the start hold storage number N of the corresponding pitching unit is incremented by 1 in step S2402. At the same time, the total number of reservations (hereinafter referred to as the common reservation number CRN) stored in the reservation number storage area FE in step S2403 is incremented by one.

  In the subsequent step S2404, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS updated in the updating process of various counters in the timer interrupt process (see step S103) are used for the operating port. It is stored in the first storage area among the free storage area areas of the reservation area RE, that is, the storage area corresponding to the common reservation number CRN incremented by 1 in step S2403.

  In subsequent step S2405 and step S2406, the notification / production control device 610 and the display control device 620, which are the control devices on the sub-side (sub-side), recognize that the winning has entered the operating ball entering portions 62 and 63, and hold. The confirmation process for holding notice and the setting process of the holding command, which are processes for executing the notice effect, are executed, and this information acquisition process is ended. Note that the hold command includes information indicating which of the upper operation entrance portion 62 and the lower operation entrance portion 63 is based on a winning entry to the operation entry portion.

  The hold command set in the hold command setting process in step S2406 is transmitted to the notification / production control device 610 and the display control device 620 in the normal output external output process (step S501). The display control device 620 receives the hold command and executes a process for changing the display in the hold number display area Da described above in accordance with the increase in the hold number. Specifically, when the display control device 620 receives the same command via the notification / production control device 610, the display control device 620 displays (for example, adds) the hold display image MP in the hold number display area Da. Execute the process. In the hold number display area Da, the hold images are displayed sequentially from the left side. For example, if the common hold number CRN is 1, the hold image is displayed in the first unit hold display area Da1 at the left end, and the common hold is displayed. If the number CRN is 8, the hold image is displayed in the eighth unit hold display area Da8 that is the eighth from the left.

  Hereinafter, the confirmation process for holding notice in step S2405 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Confirmation process for hold notice)
In the confirmation process for the hold notice, first, the start hold storage number N and the common hold number CRN stored in the hold number storage area FE of the hold ball storage area 604b are read, and information on the hold number is stored in the register of the MPU 602. (Step S2501). Thereafter, in steps S2502 to S2506, it is confirmed whether or not the hold information acquired by the current winning is corresponding to the jackpot winning.

  Specifically, first, in step S2502, the information for jackpot determination out of the hold information acquired in step S2404 based on the current winnings to the operation pitching units 62 and 63, that is, the acquired jackpot random number counter C1. Know the value.

  In a succeeding step S2503, it is determined whether or not the low probability mode is set. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current lottery mode is the low probability mode by determining whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604. If it is in the low probability mode, the process proceeds to step S2504. In step S2504, with reference to the low probability mode success / failure table, it is determined whether or not the jackpot determination information (value of the jackpot random number counter C1) grasped in step S2502 is included in the information group corresponding to the jackpot winner To do. On the other hand, if it is the high probability mode, the process proceeds to step S2505. In step S2505, with reference to the success / failure table for the high probability mode, it is specified whether the information for determining the big hit (the value of the big hit random number counter C1) grasped in step S2502 is included in the information set as the big win To do.

  After executing the processing of step S2504 or step S2505, the process proceeds to step S2506, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot determination information (value of the jackpot random number counter C1) grasped in step S2502 corresponds to the jackpot winning. . If it corresponds to the jackpot winning, the jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 602 in step S2507, and the confirmation process for this reservation notice is finished as it is.

  In the process of step S2507, the information for determining the jackpot type in the hold information acquired in step S2404 based on the current winning, that is, the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is ascertained, and the distribution table is referred to. The jackpot type is determined. The information stored in the register of the MPU 602 in step S2507 includes information related to the jackpot type.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2506, the process proceeds to step S2508. In step S2508, outreach determination information, that is, the value of the acquired reach random number counter C3 is grasped out of the hold information acquired in step S2404 based on the current winnings to the operation pitching units 62 and 63.

  In the subsequent step S2509, the reach determination table (reach determination information group) stored in the reach determination table storage area (reach determination information group storage means) of the ROM 603 is referred to, and the reach grasped in step S2508 is determined. It is specified whether the information for determination (the value of the reach random number counter C3) is included in the information set as the reach winning.

  After executing the process of step S2509, the process proceeds to step S2510, and it is determined whether or not the reach determination information (value of the reach random number counter C3) grasped in step S2508 corresponds to the occurrence of reach. If it corresponds to the occurrence of reach, in step S2511 the reach occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 602, and then this confirmation process is terminated. On the other hand, if it does not correspond to the occurrence of reach, this confirmation process is terminated as it is.

(Hold command setting process)
Next, the hold command setting process in step S2406 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the hold command setting process, first, in step S2601, it is determined whether or not jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 602, so that the jackpot determination process is performed in the immediately preceding hold notice confirmation process (FIG. 42). It is determined whether or not the information is identified as corresponding to the jackpot winning. If jackpot information is stored, the process advances to step S2602 to set a jackpot correspondence pending command. Note that the above-described command setting and various command settings described later are performed by storing command information in a command setting area provided in the RAM 604. Incidentally, the jackpot corresponding hold command includes information related to the jackpot type.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2601, that is, if it is determined that jackpot information is not stored in the register of MPU 602, the process proceeds to step S2603, and whether or not reach occurrence information is stored in the register of MPU 602. It is determined whether or not the information for reach determination is identified as corresponding to the occurrence of reach in the confirmation processing for the previous hold notice (FIG. 42). If the reach occurrence information is stored, a release reach hold command is set in step S2604, and if the reach occurrence information is not stored, a complete release hold command is set in step S2605.

  When the hold command is set in steps S2602, S2604, and S2605, the change display time is determined with reference to the value of the change type counter CS and the information related to the change display time is stored in the hold command. . In determining the variable display time, the variable display time table is referred to in the same manner as the variable display time setting process shown in step S708. The hold command set in this way is transmitted to the notification / production control device 610, and the notification / production control device 610 can grasp the variation display mode of the symbols based on the hold command. Note that, as described above, in the case of complete detachment, the variable display time can be changed according to the number of the hold information stored when starting the game times related to the hold information. Therefore, when setting a completely out of correspondence hold command, a temporary setting of the variable display time is performed.

  After executing the command setting process of any one of step S2602, step S2604, and step S2605, in step S2606, a process of setting the information on the number of hold for the hold command is executed. Specifically, as the processing, the hold command information set as described above is configured as information of a plurality of bytes, and information indicating that the command is a hold command or a hold command for some of the bits. Are included, and information on the number of holds can be set.

  In step S2606, first, the information on the number of holdings stored in the register of the MPU 602 in step S2501 in the confirmation processing for the previous holding notice (FIG. 42) is read, and then the number of holdings in the already set holding command is read. The read information on the reserved number is stored in the information bits by an arithmetic process such as logical sum. As a result, for the hold command set in any one of steps S2602, S2604, and S2605, information for specifying the number of hold information corresponding to the hold command Will be included. After executing the processing in step S2606 described in detail above, the pending command setting processing is terminated.

  The hold command including the hold number information in step S2606 is transmitted to the notification / production control device 610 by the external output process in step S501 in the next normal process (FIG. 14). The notification / production control device 610 specifies that the hold information has increased by receiving the hold command. Further, the notification / production control device 610 adds information for holding notice to be described later to the holding command and transmits the information to the display control device 620. The display control device 620 executes a hold display or a hold notice process based on the received hold command.

  Also, the setting method of the hold command is determined based on whether the notification / production control device 610 or the display control device 620 holds the big win, whether or not the big win is won, the big win type in the case of the big win, and the reach if it is not the big win It is arbitrary as long as it is possible to specify the presence / absence of occurrence, in other words, the variation display mode of the symbol. For example, a combination of a jackpot corresponding pending command, a miss reach pending command, and a perfect miss pending command is individually set in correspondence with the number of each pending, and in the pending command setting process, in the confirmation process for pending notice A configuration is also possible in which one pending command is selected according to the confirmation result.

  Next, a process related to the hold notice executed by the MPU 612 of the notification / production control device 610 will be described. As the process related to the hold notice, a command response process for determining a command from the main control device 162 and a hold notice effect setting process for determining a hold notice form are set.

(Processing for pending commands)
In the pending command handling process, when the pending command transmitted by the main controller 162 is received, the process corresponding to the information included in the received pending command is executed. The pending command handling process is executed as part of a periodic process that is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle).

  In the pending command handling process, it is first determined whether or not a pending command has been received. The command received by the MPU 612 of the notification / production control device 610 is temporarily stored in the command storage area of the RAM 614. The command storage area is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can be read from the previously stored commands. Processing corresponding to the command can be executed satisfactorily. When determining whether or not a corresponding pending command has been received, it is determined whether or not a jackpot corresponding pending command has been received in the current read target area in the command storage area 261. It should be noted that the configuration of reading out such commands is the same in reading out other commands such as a change start command.

  When the hold command is received, various information included in the hold command is stored in the hold information storage area. The hold information storage area has a first area to an eighth area, and is configured to store one hold information for each area. The hold information stored in each area is sequentially shifted to the lower area side when a shift command is received from the main control device 162, that is, when game play is started. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area, etc. The eighth area → the seventh area, etc. The data in each area is shifted to Also in the hold information storage area of the notification / effect control device 610, hold information is stored in a time series in a time-sequential manner regardless of the destination, similarly to the hold ball storage area 604b (specifically, the hold area RE) of the main control device 162. It becomes the composition which is done. Specifically, information on the number of holds included in the command received this time is specified, and the above-described various information is stored in an area corresponding to the specified information on the number of holds among the first to eighth areas.

  When a hold command is received, a hold command reception flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 614. When a shift command is received, a shift command reception flag is set in the various flag storage areas. . Each of these flags is triggered by a setting process for the hold notice effect described below, and is erased when the setting process for the hold notice effect ends.

  In the MPU 612 of the notification / production control device 610, the setting process for the hold notice effect is performed based on the information stored in the hold information storage area. Here, the holding notice effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting process for holding notice effect is a process that is executed as part of a periodic process that is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec cycle), provided that the above-described holding command or shifting command is received. Is executed as In other words, in the present embodiment, the trigger for executing the hold notice effect is when the hold information is acquired with the winning to the actuating ball units 62 and 63 or when the hold information is digested with the progress of the game. It has become.

(Setting process for hold notice effect)
In the hold notice effect setting process, first, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not the hold notice effect is being performed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2701, the setting process for the on-hold notice effect is ended as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S2701, the process proceeds to step S2702.

  In step S2702, it is determined whether a hold command is received from main controller 162. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2702, a lottery process when a hold command is received is executed in step S2703 to determine whether or not a hold notice effect is performed. If a negative determination is made in step S2702, the process proceeds to step S2704. In step S2704, it is determined whether or not a shift command is received from main controller 162. If a negative determination is made in step S2704, that is, if it is determined that neither a hold command nor a shift command has been received, the setting process for the hold notice effect is ended as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2704, a lottery process at the time of receiving a shift command is executed in step S2705, and it is determined whether or not a hold notice effect is to be performed.

  After executing the process of step S2703 or step S2705, the process proceeds to step S2706. In step S2706, it is determined whether or not the hold is seriously won. If a negative determination is made in step S2706, the setting process for the on-hold notice effect is ended as it is. If a positive determination is made in step S2706, the process proceeds to step S2707. In step S2707, a hold notice flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 614. The hold notice flag set in step S2707 is deleted when the hold notice effect ends. In step S2701, it is determined whether or not a pending notice is being made based on whether or not the pending notice flag is set.

  In the subsequent step S2708, the mode of the hold notice effect (hold notice pattern) is determined. Thereafter, after executing the notice effect start process in step S2709, the setting process for the hold notice effect is ended.

  In the present embodiment, as the hold notice effect, there are a first type notice effect and a second type notice effect with different notice modes, and in step S2708, a single notice and a second kind notice are provided. One of a single notice by the effect, a combined notice by the first type notice effect & the second type notice effect is selected. Hereinafter, each notice effect will be described with reference to the schematic diagrams of FIGS. 45 and 46.

  As shown in FIG. 45, the first type notice effect is executed by displaying a predetermined notice picture (specifically, a moving image) in the variable display area ME on the display screen 75a of the picture display device 75. Specifically, it is executed by displaying a predetermined notice picture during the game times that have been triggered by the hold notice and the game times that are executed before that.

  More specifically, a predetermined preview image is displayed in conjunction with the start of the symbol variation display (in conjunction with the on-hold shift). The display of the predetermined preview image is continued until the game time (hereinafter referred to as the corresponding game number) related to the hold information (hereinafter referred to as the corresponding hold or the corresponding hold information) that triggered the reservation notice. In this way, if it is noted that at least the hold information is triggered until at least the corresponding game times, the hold notice is not clearly indicated, that is, if it is not indicated, the type 1 notice effect is used to specify the hold. By making it difficult, it can be said that this is a hold notice effect with a function of improving the degree of attention to the entire remaining hold.

  A plurality of preview images to be displayed are set for the first type of notification effect. In the present embodiment, a bubble image is displayed (variably displayed) as the first-type notice effect for the notice effect. However, there are a plurality of patterns having different amounts of displayed bubbles. Specifically, three patterns of level 1 with a small amount of bubbles, level 2 with a larger amount of bubbles than level 1 and level 3 with a larger amount of bubbles than level 2 are set.

  The first type notice effect is the fixed type first kind notice effect A in which the level selected at the start of the notice effect is maintained until the end of the notice effect, and the above level by the advance of the game times (when the notice continues) Has a step-up type first kind notice effect B that rises. For the distribution of the first type notice effect A and the first type notice effect B, the first type notice effect distribution table stored in the lottery table storage area of the ROM 613 is referred to.

  Regarding the first type notice effect distribution table, the corresponding hold corresponds to the jackpot result, the one corresponding to each super-reach A-C, the one corresponding to each normal reach A, B, and completely off It consists of a corresponding one. As already described, in this embodiment, the super hit C> super reach B> super reach A> normal reach B> normal reach A> completely out of order is set so that the expectation of jackpot at the time of occurrence of the variable display increases. Yes. In each table, the higher the jackpot expectation set in the various display modes, the greater the proportion of the latter in the first type notice effect A and the first type notice effect B (selection rate is Configured to be higher). Therefore, the expectation level that results in the jackpot is higher when the first notice effect B is executed than when the first type notice effect A is executed.

  In the first type notice effect A, when the corresponding hold corresponds to the jackpot result, it is easy to select in order of level 3> level 2> level 1, and the corresponding hold corresponds to the result of the release. In this case, it is easy to select in the order of level 1> level 2> level 3.

  In the first type notice effect B, an initial level and a finally reached level are selected. In this selection, as in the first type notice effect A, when the corresponding hold corresponds to the jackpot result, it is easy to select in order of level 3> level 2> level 1, and the corresponding hold is In the case of dealing with an outlier result, it is easy to select in the order of level 1> level 2> level 3.

  That is, regardless of which of the first type notice effect A and the first kind notice effect B is selected, the higher the final level, the higher the degree of expectation that leads to the jackpot result. When the first type notice effect is executed, it is difficult to see at the start of the notice effect whether it is the first kind notice effect A or the second kind notice effect B, and the notice effect ends. The expectation remains that the level will rise. When the first type notice effect is started, the player expects the level to rise as the first type notice effect continues over more game times. Therefore, the above expectation can be suitably maintained by adopting a configuration in which the corresponding game times are not explicitly shown.

  Next, the second type notice effect will be described focusing on the differences from the first kind notice effect. The second type advance notice effect is executed by changing the hold display mode or the like in the hold display area NE of the symbol display device 75 (display screen 75a) to one corresponding to the hold notice. Specifically, among the on-hold display images MP displayed in the on-hold number display area Da, the one corresponding to the game time (the corresponding hold) is changed (the color is changed in the present embodiment). The on-hold display image MP whose color has changed as the game times have progressed is sequentially shifted toward the execution target display area Db (see FIG. 46).

  While the above-mentioned type 1 notice effect is a configuration that does not clearly indicate which hold information is triggered when the first type notice effect becomes the corresponding game times, the type 2 notice effect triggers which hold information. Is different in that the reservation notice is clearly indicated. Thus, by clearly indicating the corresponding hold, the degree of attention to the corresponding game times can be suitably improved.

  In the second type notice effect, the second kind notice effects A and B in which the color of the execution target display area Db does not change when the changed hold display image MP reaches the execution target display area Db, and the changed hold display. When the work image MP reaches the execution target display area Db, the color of the execution target display area Db changes to a color corresponding to the color of the hold display image MP (specifically, an effect of the same color occurs) It is roughly divided into seed notice effects C and D.

  For the distribution of the second type notice effects A and B and the second type notice effects C and D, the second type notice effect distribution table stored in the lottery table storage area of the ROM 243 is referred to. Regarding the type 2 notice effect distribution table, the corresponding hold corresponds to the jackpot result, the one corresponding to each super-reach A-C, the one corresponding to each normal reach A, B, and completely off It consists of a corresponding one. Each of these tables is configured such that the higher the jackpot expectation set in various variable display modes, the more the latter occupies the second type notice effects A and B and the second kind notice effects C and D. ing. Therefore, the degree of expectation that results in the jackpot is higher when the second notice effects C and D are executed than when the second type notice effects A and B are executed.

  Also in the second type notice effect, a plurality of patterns are set for the colors of the on-hold display image MP to be displayed and the background (effect) of the execution target display area Db. Specifically, three patterns of blue level 1, yellow level 2, and red level 3 are set.

  The second type notice effect is a fixed type second kind notice effect A, C in which the level selected at the notice effect is maintained, and the above-mentioned level rises as the game time advances (following the notice) It has up-type second type notice effects B and D. As for the distribution of the second-type notice effects A and C and the second-type notice effects B and D, the second-type notice effect distribution table stored in the lottery table storage area of the ROM 243 is also referred to. When the second type notice effects C and D are executed, the color of the execution target display area Db is changed to be the same color as the final reserved display image MP.

  Regarding the type 2 notice effect distribution table, the corresponding hold corresponds to the jackpot result, the one corresponding to each super-reach A-C, the one corresponding to each normal reach A, B, and completely off It consists of a corresponding one. In each of these tables, as the jackpot expectation level becomes higher (as the jackpot expectation level related to the variation display mode becomes higher), the proportion of the latter among the second type notice effects A and C and the second kind notice effects B and D Is configured to increase. Therefore, when the second type notice effects A and C are executed and when the second kind notice effects B and D are executed, the degree of expectation that results in a big hit is higher.

  In the type 2 notice effects A and C, when the corresponding hold corresponds to the jackpot result, it is easy to select the order of level 3> level 2> level 1, and the corresponding hold corresponds to the release result. In this case, it is easy to select level 1> level 2> level 3 in this order.

  In the second type notice effects B and D, an initial level and a finally reached level are selected. In this selection, as in the case of the second type notice effects A and B, when the corresponding hold corresponds to the jackpot result, it is easy to select in order of level 3> level 2> level 1. When the hold corresponds to the release result, it is easy to select the order of level 1> level 2> level 3.

  That is, regardless of which of the second type notice effects A to D is selected, the higher the final level, the higher the degree of expectation that will lead to the jackpot result.

  The hold notice effect is executed when the hold information corresponds to the jackpot result or when it corresponds to the super reach A to C as compared with other cases (completely missed or normal reach). The possibility increases. Since it is such a structure, when a holding notice effect is performed, the expectation that it will be a jackpot result becomes large.

  When determining whether or not to perform the hold notice effect described in detail above by lottery, the lottery table for the jackpot result to be referred to when the corresponding hold information is a jackpot result, the hold information is not compatible with reach display Either a lottery table for display of outliers that is referred to in the case of a result, or a lottery table for complete outage that is referred to when the corresponding hold information is a result of complete outage. In the present embodiment, in particular, not only does the difference in the probability of the on-hold announcement effect occur depending on the details of the on-hold information (big hit / loss, etc.), but it is stored when determining whether to hold the on-hold announcement effect by lottery. A plurality of types of table groups described above are provided in accordance with the number of the hold information so that a difference occurs in the probability of the hold notice effect depending on the number of the hold information. Hereinafter, the process related to the lottery of the hold notice effect, that is, the lottery process at the time of holding command reception at step S2703 and the lottery process at the time of command reception at step S2705 will be described.

(Lottery process when receiving hold command)
As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 47A, in the lottery process for holding command reception, first, in step S2801, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the low frequency support mode. If it is not in the low frequency support mode, that is, if it is in the high frequency support mode, a normal lottery process is executed in step S2802. In the normal lottery process, the normal lottery table for the hold notice effect stored in the various table storage areas of the ROM 613 is referred to and it is determined whether or not the hold notice effect is to be performed by lottery. Specifically, when the hold information is a jackpot result, a normal lottery table for winning results, and when the hold information is a reach result corresponding to reach display, a normal lottery table for miss reach display, corresponding hold If the information is a result of complete losing, it is determined whether or not a holding notice effect is to be performed by lottery with reference to a normal lottery table for complete losing. In the normal lottery process, there is no difference in the occurrence probability of the hold notice effect depending on the number of hold information stored in advance.

  In addition, when the storage destination of the corresponding hold information related to the hold command received this time is from the first area to the eighth area, the start notification of the hold notice effect is held before the game time related to the hold information is started. Production is performed. On the other hand, when the storage destination of the hold information is the execution area, the start timing of the hold notice effect is the start of the game times related to the hold information. Therefore, the hold notice effect constitutes a part of the effect in the corresponding game times.

  If a positive determination is made in step S2801, the process proceeds to step S2803. In step S2803, based on the operation detection information from the game ball launch handle 41, it is determined whether or not a game ball launch operation is being performed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2803, the normal lottery process (step S2801) is executed, and then the lottery process for receiving the hold command is terminated. That is, even when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the normal lottery process is executed when the game ball is being fired.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2803, that is, if the low-frequency support mode is being performed and the game ball is not being fired, the process proceeds to step S2804. In step S2804, special lottery processing is executed. In the special lottery process, a special lottery table for holding notice effect stored in various table storage areas of the ROM 613 is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the holding notice effect is performed by lottery.

  Specifically, a special lottery table for jackpot results when the corresponding hold information is a jackpot result, a special lottery table for outreach display when the hold information is a reach result corresponding to reach display, the corresponding hold If the information is a result of complete losing, the special lottery table for complete losing is referred to determine whether or not the holding notice effect is performed by lottery. In the special lottery process, there is a difference in the occurrence probability of the hold notice effect depending on the number of hold information stored in advance. Specifically, when comparing the normal lottery table for outlier reach and the special lottery table for outlier reach display, when comparing the normal lottery table for complete outage and the special lottery table for complete outage, Since the probability is raised by the influence of the number of stored hold information, the special lottery table is more likely to win the lottery for the hold notice effect.

  In addition, when the normal lottery table for jackpot results is compared with the special lottery table for jackpot results, such a difference is not set. That is, although the names are different for convenience of explanation, the normal lottery table for jackpot results and the special lottery table for jackpot results are the same.

  Here, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 47 (b), the difference between the normal lottery table and the special lottery table for miss reach or complete miss will be described.

  As described above, when the normal lottery table and the special lottery table are compared, there is a difference in the probability of winning the lottery for the holding notice effect. Specifically, when the addition destination of the hold information acquired this time is the execution area, a 15% difference is provided in the occurrence probability of the hold notice effect when comparing the normal lottery table and the special lottery table. . That is, when the number of stored hold information is “0”, the probability of occurrence of the hold notice effect is increased by 15%.

  When the addition destination of the hold information acquired this time is the first area, a comparison of the normal lottery table and the special lottery table shows a difference of 10% in the occurrence probability of the hold notice effect. That is, when the number of stored hold information is “1”, the probability of the hold notice effect is increased by 10%.

  When the addition destination of the hold information acquired this time is the second area, a comparison of the normal lottery table and the special lottery table shows a difference of 5% in the occurrence probability of the hold notice effect. That is, when the number of stored hold information is “2”, the probability of the hold notice effect is increased by 5%.

  When the addition destination of the hold information acquired this time is the third area, when the normal lottery table and the special lottery table are compared with each other, a difference of 3% is provided in the occurrence probability of the hold notice effect. That is, if the number of stored hold information is “3”, the probability of the hold notice effect is increased by 3%.

  When the addition destination of the hold information acquired this time is the fourth area, a comparison of the normal lottery table and the special lottery table shows a difference of 1% in the occurrence probability of the hold notice effect. That is, when the number of stored hold information is “4”, the occurrence probability of the hold notice effect is increased by 1%.

  When the addition destination of the hold information acquired this time is the fifth area to the eighth area, there is no difference in the occurrence probability of the hold notice effect when comparing the normal lottery table and the special lottery table. That is, when the number of stored hold information is “5” to “8”, an increase in the occurrence probability of the hold notice effect is avoided.

  As described above, when the normal table is referred to, the lottery probability (occurrence probability) of the hold notice effect is set to be the same regardless of the number of stored hold information, and the special table is referred to. In this case, the lottery probability is set so that the lottery information stored is smaller and the increase range of the lottery probability is larger.

  When a lottery of a hold notice effect is performed with the receipt of a hold command, only the hold information added this time (the corresponding hold information) is set as a lottery target. On the other hand, when the lottery of the hold notice effect is performed with the reception of the shift command, all the stored hold information is set as the lottery target. The shift command reception lottery process will be described below with reference to FIG.

(Lottery process when receiving command when shifting)
In the shift command reception lottery process, it is first determined in step S2901 whether or not the support mode is the low frequency support mode. If it is not in the low frequency support mode, that is, if it is in the high frequency support mode, a normal lottery process is executed in step S2902. In the normal lottery process, the normal lottery table for the hold notice effect stored in the various table storage areas of the ROM 613 is referred to and it is determined whether or not the hold notice effect is to be performed by lottery. In the normal lottery process, there is no difference in the occurrence probability of the hold notice effect depending on the number of stored hold information.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2901, that is, if the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S2903. In step S2903, it is determined whether there is subsequent hold information. If an affirmative determination is made in step S 2903, the normal lottery process is executed in step S 2902, and then the lottery process at the time of receiving this shift command is terminated. For example, when the number of hold information stored by the current shift decreases from “3” to “2”, the hold information stored in the execution area and the first area is subject to normal lottery processing. Become.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2903, the process proceeds to step S2904. In step S2904, based on the operation detection information from the game ball launch handle 41, it is determined whether or not a game ball launch operation is being performed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2803, the normal lottery process in step S2801 is executed, and then the lottery process for receiving the hold command is terminated. That is, even when the low-frequency support mode is set, the normal lottery process is executed when the game ball is fired.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2803, that is, if the low-frequency support mode is being performed and the game ball is not being fired, the process proceeds to step S2804. In step S2804, special lottery processing is executed. In the special lottery process, a special lottery table for holding notice effect stored in various table storage areas of the ROM 613 is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the holding notice effect is performed by lottery.

  Specifically, the special lottery table for the jackpot result when the corresponding hold information subject to the lottery is a jackpot result, and for the miss reach display when the corresponding hold information is a reach result corresponding to the reach display If the special lottery table or the corresponding hold information is a result of complete losing, the special lottery table for complete losing is referred to determine whether or not the holding notice effect is to be performed by lottery. In the special lottery process, there is a difference in the occurrence probability of the hold notice effect depending on the number of hold information stored in advance. Specifically, when comparing the normal lottery table for outlier reach and the special lottery table for outlier reach display, when comparing the normal lottery table for complete outage and the special lottery table for complete outage, Since the probability is raised by the influence of the number of stored hold information, the special lottery table is more likely to win the lottery for the hold notice effect.

  In addition, when the normal lottery table for jackpot results is compared with the special lottery table for jackpot results, such a difference is not set. That is, although the names are different for convenience of explanation, the normal lottery table for jackpot results and the special lottery table for jackpot results are the same.

  Here, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 48 (b), the difference between the normal lottery table and the special lottery table for miss reach or complete miss will be described.

  As described above, when the normal lottery table and the special lottery table are compared, there is a difference in the probability of winning the lottery for the holding notice effect. Specifically, when the addition destination of the hold information acquired this time is the execution area, a 15% difference is provided in the occurrence probability of the hold notice effect when comparing the normal lottery table and the special lottery table. . That is, when the number of stored hold information is “0”, the probability of the hold notice effect is increased by 30%.

  When the addition destination of the hold information acquired this time is the first area, a comparison of the normal lottery table and the special lottery table shows a difference of 20% in the occurrence probability of the hold notice effect. That is, when the number of stored hold information is “1”, the probability of the hold notice effect is increased by 10%.

  When the addition destination of the hold information acquired this time is the second area, a comparison of the normal lottery table and the special lottery table shows a difference of 15% in the occurrence probability of the hold notice effect. That is, when the number of stored hold information is “2”, the probability of the hold notice effect is increased by 5%.

  When the addition destination of the hold information acquired this time is the third area, when the normal lottery table and the special lottery table are compared, there is a difference of 10% in the occurrence probability of the hold notice effect. That is, if the number of stored hold information is “3”, the probability of the hold notice effect is increased by 3%.

  When the addition destination of the hold information acquired this time is the fourth area, when the normal lottery table and the special lottery table are compared, there is a difference of 5% in the occurrence probability of the hold notice effect. That is, when the number of stored hold information is “4”, the occurrence probability of the hold notice effect is increased by 1%.

  When the addition destination of the hold information acquired this time is the fifth area to the eighth area, there is no difference in the occurrence probability of the hold notice effect when comparing the normal lottery table and the special lottery table. That is, when the number of stored hold information is “5” to “8”, an increase in the occurrence probability of the hold notice effect is avoided.

  As described above, when the normal table is referred to, the lottery probability (occurrence probability) of the hold notice effect is set to be the same regardless of the number of stored hold information, and the special table is referred to. In this case, the lottery probability is set so that the lottery information stored is smaller and the increase range of the lottery probability is larger.

  In this embodiment, when the hold information is newly stored (added) and the shift of the hold information occurs (when the hold information is digested), the hold notice effect is given. The occurrence probability is different. Specifically, when comparing the storage information of the hold information as the same, the hold information is shifted to the predetermined storage area as compared with the case where the hold information is newly stored in the predetermined storage area. A difference is set in the probability of occurrence so that the holding notice effect is more likely to occur. Hereinafter, the description will be supplemented with reference to FIGS. 47 (b) and 48 (b).

  When the number of stored hold information is “0” and newly acquired hold information is stored in the execution area, the occurrence probability of the hold notice effect is 15% by referring to the special table. To rise. In contrast, when the number of stored hold information is changed from “2” to “1”, when the latest hold information moves to the execution area, the special table is referred to. The probability of occurrence of the hold notice effect increases by 30%. In other words, when the lottery for the hold notice effect is performed based on the hold information stored in the execution area, whether the hold information is directly stored in the execution area or is shifted from the first area to the execution area. The probability that the on-hold notice effect will be executed differs greatly depending on whether or not it has shifted to.

  When the number of stored hold information is “1” and the newly acquired hold information is stored in the first area, the occurrence probability of the hold notice effect is 10 by referring to the special table. %To rise. On the other hand, when the number of stored hold information is changed from “3” to “2”, when the newest hold information moves to the first area, the special table is referred to. Thus, the probability of occurrence of the hold notice effect increases by 20%. In other words, when the lottery for the hold notice effect is performed based on the hold information stored in the first area, whether the hold information is directly stored in the first area or shifted from the second area. The probability that the on-hold notice effect is executed differs greatly depending on whether it has moved to the first area.

  When the number of stored hold information is “2” and the newly acquired hold information is stored in the second area, the occurrence probability of the hold notice effect is 5 by referring to the special table. %To rise. On the other hand, when the number of stored hold information is changed from “4” to “3”, when the newest hold information moves to the second area, the special table is referred to. This increases the probability of holding notice effect by 15%. In other words, when the lottery for the hold notice effect is performed based on the hold information stored in the second area, is the hold information stored directly in the second area or shifted from the third area? The probability that the hold notice effect will be executed differs greatly depending on whether it has moved to the second area.

  When the number of stored hold information is “3” and newly acquired hold information is stored in the third area, the probability of occurrence of the hold notice effect is 3 by referring to the special table. %To rise. On the other hand, when the number of stored hold information is changed from “5” to “4”, when the newest hold information moves to the third area, the special table is referred to. Thus, the probability of occurrence of the hold notice effect increases by 10%. In other words, when performing a lottery of the hold notice effect based on the hold information stored in the third area, is the hold information stored directly in the third area or shifted from the fourth area? The probability that the on-hold notice effect is executed differs greatly depending on whether it has moved to the third area.

  When the number of stored hold information is “4” and newly acquired hold information is stored in the fourth area, the occurrence probability of the hold notice effect is 1 by referring to the special table. %To rise. On the other hand, in the process of changing the number of stored hold information from “6” to “5”, when the newest hold information moves to the fourth area, the special table is referred to. This increases the probability of holding notice effects by 5%. In other words, when the lottery for the hold notice effect is performed based on the hold information stored in the fourth area, is the hold information stored directly in the fourth area or shifted from the fifth area? The probability that the hold notice effect will be executed differs greatly depending on whether it has moved to the fourth area.

  When the number of stored hold information is “5” to “8”, the occurrence probability change as described above does not occur.

  According to the eleventh embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

  The hold notice effect is executed when newly acquired hold information is added to the hold information storage area or when already stored hold information is digested and other hold information is shifted. In this way, diversifying the execution timing of the hold notice effect is preferable in order to suppress monotonization of the game.

  A difference is provided so that the hold notice effect is more easily executed when the hold information is shifted than when the hold information is newly added. By making it easier for the hold notice effect to be executed when a shift occurs, it is possible to prevent the opportunity for executing the hold notice effect from being greatly reduced even when the game proceeds without adding hold information.

  Here, when the player finishes the game, in many cases, the release of the game ball is stopped in a state where the hold information remains. Then, after confirming whether or not the stored hold information is correct, the user leaves the seat. Here, when hold information is stored in the first area to the fourth area, the hold information is moved from another storage area by a shift when the hold information is newly acquired and by a shift. It is roughly divided into things. In consideration of the flow at the end, when the hold information moves from the first area to the fourth area due to the shift, the hold notice effect is more likely to occur than when the hold information is newly added. Become. In other words, the hold notice effect is likely to occur when the user waits for digestion of the hold information before leaving. Thereby, it is possible to give the player an expectation that any of the existing hold information may be a trigger for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode. Since this can be an opportunity to promote continuation of the game, it can contribute to an improvement in the operating rate of the game machine.

  On the other hand, in the process in which the number of pieces of reserved information acquired one after another and accumulated in the reserved information storage area is increased, the probability of generating the reserved notice effect is lower than that in the decreasing process described above. In the increase process, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the hold notice effect by deliberately suppressing the occurrence of the hold notice effect as annoying to the player.

  When the subsequent hold information is not stored, that is, when the hold information moved from the first area to the fourth area by the shift is the last (latest) hold information, the special table is referred to, and the subsequent hold information is If stored, the normal table is referenced. This makes it easier for the former to execute the hold notice effect than the latter. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prompt the player who is going to leave his seat to look forward to the stored information stored last. In such a case, it is possible to prepare for the launch of a game ball in preparation for the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, or to expect that the state (state) of the gaming machine may be good. Thereby, continuation of a game is promoted and it can contribute suitably for the improvement of the operation rate mentioned above.

  When the continuation of the game is urged by generating the hold notice effect, such a function is frequently exhibited, so that the reliability of the hold notice effect itself is lowered. Therefore, when determining whether or not to execute the hold notice circle for the hold information moved from the first area to the fourth area, the presence or absence of the subsequent hold information is taken into consideration, so that the hold notice effect in an inappropriate situation is taken into consideration. The occurrence of the inconvenience can be suppressed by suppressing the random occurrence.

  As described above, in the configuration that encourages the continuation of the game using the hold notice effect, if the hold notice effect occurs frequently in a situation where the player does not intend to end the game, the trust to the hold notice effect is likely to occur. The feeling decreases. Thus, when the reliability of the hold notice effect is lowered, there is a concern that the effect of prompting the continuation of the game by the hold notice effect will not be exhibited well. Here, when the player finishes the game, the game ball is often stopped in a state in which the hold information remains, and he leaves the seat after seeing the determination result of the stored hold information. Easy to carry. In the present embodiment, in view of such circumstances, when a game ball launch operation is not performed, the preferential treatment of the hold notice effect triggered by the above-described shift is regulated, so that there is no darkness. It is possible to prevent an increase in the occurrence chance of the hold notice effect. As a result, it is possible to suitably exhibit the effect of prompting the continuation of the game by the holding notice effect.

  In the present embodiment, a game ball launch operation is performed as a determination condition for determining whether or not to perform the restriction. However, whether or not a game ball is fired by the game ball launch mechanism 110 is determined. It is also possible to set this as a criterion for the regulation.

  In the first place, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, it is self-evident that the player is in an advantageous state from the movement of the electric accessory 71 and the like. Therefore, there are few opportunities for the game to be terminated in such a situation. Therefore, a practically preferable configuration can be realized by adopting a configuration that avoids the lottery of the on-hold announcement effect referring to the special table during the high frequency support mode. Note that if a hold notice effect is generated with the aim of prompting continuation of the game when it is determined that the result will be a losing result, the reliability of the hold notice effect inevitably decreases. Therefore, it is technically significant to make a configuration that does not increase the probability of occurrence of the hold notice effect in a situation where the player will continue to play without prompting the game to continue.

<Modification 1>
In the eleventh embodiment, when the comparison is made in the same storage area, the hold notice effect is more likely to occur when the hold information is shifted than when the hold information is newly acquired. Such a function may be applied to all storage areas (execution area, first area to eighth area), or may be applied to a specific area such as (execution area or first area). Good.

<Modification 2>
In the eleventh embodiment, when the support mode by the electric accessory 71 is the low frequency support mode, the lottery for generating the hold notice effect can be executed with reference to the special table, while the high frequency When the support mode is set, a configuration in which a lottery for generating a holding notice effect is executed with reference to a normal table is adopted. In other words, an increase in the probability of occurrence of the hold notice effect is avoided during the high frequency support mode. The function that increases the probability of the on-hold announcement effect by reducing the number of stored on-hold information, and the function that the probability of occurrence of the on-hold announcement effect changes depending on how the hold information is stored are valid for each gaming state. / No need to switch. For example, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the same lottery aspect as that when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode can be used.

<Modification 3>
In the eleventh embodiment, the selection of the table relating to the lottery for generating the holding notice effect depends on which of the upper operation entrance portion 62 and the lower operation entrance portion 63 is entered. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In view of the fact that the entrance to the upper working entrance 62 occurs mainly under the low frequency support mode and the entrance to the lower operation entrance 63 occurs mainly under the high frequency support mode. When there is holding information related to the lower action ball entry portion 63 in the holding information that has been made, the lottery with reference to the special table is avoided (configuration that is a lottery by the normal table) It is also possible. In addition, when the hold information that is the trigger for the hold notice effect is the hold information that is related to the lower operation ball entry unit 63, the lottery with reference to the special table is avoided (the lottery by the normal table) It is also possible to adopt a configuration of

<Modification 4>
In the eleventh embodiment, the lottery for whether or not the hold notice effect is performed is determined when the hold information is acquired or the shift is performed. However, it is arbitrary at which timing the lottery for determining whether or not the hold notice effect is performed. For example, it is possible to perform a lottery determination regarding whether or not to hold a reservation notice at a predetermined timing during a game.

<Twelfth Embodiment> Reach Display In the eleventh embodiment, the probability of occurrence of a hold notice effect changes according to the number of stored hold information and the game situation. Thus, for example, when a game is stopped and an attempt is made to leave the seat, a hold notice effect is likely to occur. The continuation of the game can be promoted by generating a holding notice effect just before leaving. In the present embodiment, the specific configuration for prompting the continuation of the game is different from the eleventh embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration relating to a change in the occurrence probability of the effect in the present embodiment will be described.

  As already described, in the pachinko machine 10, the outline of the variation display for each game time (completely missed, reach display, etc.) is determined by the main control device 162, and the notification / production control device 610 is based on the determined information. Then, the details of the variable display are determined. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a part of the right to determine the variable display mode is transferred to the notification / production control device 610, and in a specific case, the outline and details of the variable display for each game time are notified / production. The configuration is determined by the control device 610.

  Specifically, when the reach display is performed, the variable display time set by the main controller 162 becomes longer than when the reach display is not performed (completely off). Also, if the number of stored hold information increases, the fluctuation display time is shortened for game times that are completely out of play, and if the number of stored information that is stored decreases, it changes for game times that are completely out of play. The display time becomes longer.

  The variable display time when the reach display is performed and the variable display time of the game times corresponding to a completely out-of-game game with little (for example, one) stored hold information are configured to be equal to or equivalent to each other. In the case where the number of stored hold information is small, the fluctuation display corresponding to complete detachment should be executed if it is originally, but in the notification / production control device 610 shown in the present embodiment, the variation corresponding to complete detachment Instead of display, variable display corresponding to reach display can be executed. Such conversion is configured to be executed when the number of stored hold information is one (when hold information is stored only in the execution area). As for the execution conditions for performing such special conversion, as in the case of the eleventh embodiment, it is specifically in the low-frequency support mode and the game ball is not being fired. ing. When the newly acquired hold information is stored in the execution area as it is and when the hold information stored in the first area is moved to the execution area as the hold information is digested The possibility of the above conversion occurring is higher in the latter than in the former.

  With such a configuration, when the player tries to leave the seat, reach display is likely to occur. In the case of a jackpot result, it is generally announced via a reach indication. Then, there is a case where an act of determining the state of the gaming machine or the like is performed depending on the frequency of occurrence of reach display. In particular, as shown in the first embodiment or the like, in a type of gaming machine in which it is difficult to understand that the mode is internally in a high probability mode, the occurrence of reach display is advantageous in increasing the game motivation. In this manner, by generating reach display and improving the degree of attention to the game, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the operating rate of the gaming machine.

  In the case of a gaming machine in which the gaming state (high probability mode) is unspecified, if it is announced that it is a losing result via a production with a high expectation result that is a jackpot result, it is high. There is a high possibility of making a judgment as implying that it is not the probability mode. Therefore, in the combination with such a configuration, when the reach display is generated by the above-described conversion, if the selection probability is biased so that an effect with a lower expectation than an effect with a higher expectation is selected. Good.

  When the number of stored hold information is small (in the case of one), the configuration is such that the variation display time determined by the main control device 162 corresponds to both completely out of reach and reach display. The right to decide is left to the notification / production control device 610. Accordingly, it is possible to suitably suppress an increase in the processing load of the main control device 162 due to the realization of a configuration that changes the probability of occurrence of reach display according to the situation.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of each embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. It is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or some of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be exerted) of the components to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration that is a combination of the embodiments, or a part or all of the configurations may be applied in combination.

  (1) In each of the above-described embodiments, the number of the left general winning holes 61L arranged on the left route is different from the number of the right general winning holes 61R arranged on the right route. The number of winning openings 61L may be the same as the number of right general winning openings 61R.

  (2) In each of the above embodiments, the left through gate 66L disposed in the left route and the right through gate 66R disposed in the right route are used in combination. However, these two through gates 66L and 66R are used in combination. One of them can be omitted.

  In addition, the through gates 66L and 66R are provided with functions as operation gates that trigger the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. However, as the operation gates in the ball entrance portions (for example, the general winning a prize opening 61) other than the through gates 66L and 66R. It is also possible to give this function.

  (3) It is not always necessary to use the through gate 66 for the winning portion to be monitored in the winning order, and the general winning opening 61 can be monitored in the winning order.

  In each of the above embodiments, the pitched portion where the difference in the winning probability is unlikely to be generated depending on the skill of the player is set as the monitoring target. However, the pitched portion where the difference in the winning probability is likely to be determined depending on the skill of the player is monitored. May be set as

  (4) In each of the above embodiments, when the lottery mode is the high probability mode, for example, it is configured to shift to the low probability mode based on, for example, a normal jackpot result. It may be changed as follows. That is, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the mode is shifted to the low probability mode when the number of games executed under the situation of the high probability mode reaches a preset number.

  (5) In each of the above-described embodiments, when a winning is made to the upper working pitching portion 62 and the lower working pitching portion 63, a game (a lottery or the like based on holding information is executed based on the winning order) The game based on winning in one game is based on winning in the other game when winning in the upper working ball entering part 62 and the lower working ball entering part 63 occurs. It is also possible to adopt a configuration that is prioritized.

  (6) In each of the above embodiments, the left through gate 66L disposed on the left route is disposed at a position upstream of the left general winning opening 61L in the left route. However, the left through gate 66L and the left It is also possible to reverse the positional relationship of the general winning opening 61L. Further, although the left through gate 66L is disposed on the upstream side of the lower variable winning device 64 and the lower operation port 63a, it is possible to reverse these positional relationships. Furthermore, although the left general prize winning opening 61L is arranged on the upstream side of the lower variable prize-winning device 64, these arrangements can be reversed.

  Note that the positional relationship among the right through gate 66R, the right general winning opening 61R, and the lower variable winning device 64 in the right route may be arbitrarily changed as in the left route.

  (7) In the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, the stored hold information is digested in the stored order. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the hold information related to either one of the upper working ball entering part 62 and the lower working ball entering part 63 is digested with priority over the hold information related to the other. In particular, when there is a difference in the degree of advantage so that the holding information related to the lower operating ball entering portion 63 is more advantageous to the player than the holding information related to the upper operating ball entering portion 62, It is good to set it as the structure digested preferentially with respect to the pending | holding information which concerns on the lower side operation | movement entrance part 63 rather than the pending | holding information which concerns on the ball part 62.

  (8) In order to encourage the continuation of the game, when the player will leave the seat, the probability of occurrence of a predetermined effect such as the above-mentioned reserved notice effect or a predetermined super reach (a relatively high expectation super reach) It is good to comprise so that may become high. In view of such circumstances, for example, when a ball detection sensor is provided on the upper plate 33 and the remaining number of game balls is less than a predetermined number, occurrence of a predetermined effect such as a holding notice effect or super reach is generated. It is better to increase the probability. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the special lottery is executed on the condition that the number of game balls stored in the upper plate 33 is “0” and no game ball is fired. .

  In the case of having an operation unit such as a return lever that is operated when the return of the game ball stored in the upper plate 33 is received, the probability of occurrence of the predetermined effect in which the operation unit is operated is increased. It can also be configured to be higher.

  (9) When the hold information is shifted and reaches, for example, the first area (corresponding to “predetermined storage area”), the number of shifts in the process of arrival (the number of times of continuous shift toward the execution area) ), The lottery probability of the hold notice effect can be increased. For example, when the number of shifts is 1 in the process of reaching the first area, the probability of occurrence of the hold notice is 20% than in the case of referring to the normal table, and the number of shifts in the process of reaching the first area. Is 2 times, the probability of holding notice is 22% than when referring to the normal table, and when the number of shifts is 3 in the process of reaching the first area, refer to the normal table If the number of shifts is 4 in the process of reaching the first area, the probability of occurrence of the hold notice is 26% than when referring to the normal table. When the number of shifts is 5 or more in the process of reaching the first area, it is preferable to set the occurrence probability of the hold notice to be 28% as compared to the case of referring to the normal table.

  (10) In the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, the special lottery is executed on condition that the operation of the game ball launching handle 41 is not performed. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. It is also possible to exclude that the operation of the game ball launch handle 41 is not performed from the execution condition of the special lottery. Further, when the game ball launching handle 41 is provided with a regulation operation unit that regulates the launch, the case where the hand is touching from the game ball launching handle 41 and the regulation operation unit is operated is also possible. The various lottery processes (see FIGS. 47 and 48) may be executed on the assumption that the “firing operation” is performed.

  (11) In the eleventh and twelfth embodiments described above, the probability that an effect such as a hold notice effect and a super reach will increase as the number of pieces of hold information stored in advance decreases. Instead of or in addition to this, it is also possible to configure such that the probability that the effect will be generated increases as the number of the subsequent hold information decreases with respect to the hold information that is the target of the lottery for generation such as the hold notice effect. It is.

  (12) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines that release a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or games in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a big hit when a ball enters, a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and the like.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. The present invention also relates to a slot machine that gives a player a privilege such as paying out medals when a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on an effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window after the reel stops. Can be applied.

  Further, the gaming machine main body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused to start the rotation of the reel.

<Invention Group Extracted from Each Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a characteristic configuration extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

  Each of the following feature groups is: “A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching unit that launches a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by the player. When a game ball fired from the game ball launching means enters a ball entering section provided in the game area, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. (For example, see Patent Document 1) "In the gaming machine of the type described above, the structure is still improved in order to suppress the monotony of the game and suppress the decline in the player's gaming motivation. The invention of “There is room for” is made with a problem to be solved.

<Characteristic A group> The order of entrance of a plurality of entrance parts Feature A1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) for launching a game ball to the game area based on a launch operation;
A plurality of pitching portions (for example, a through gate 66 and a general winning opening 61) provided in the game area;
A pitching order setting means (a function for setting a winning order in the MPU 612 of the notification / production control device 610) for setting the pitching order to the pitching section;
Detecting means (a function for detecting the winning order in the MPU 612 of the notification / production control device 610) for detecting the order of entering the pitching section;
Means for comparing the order of entry set by the order-of-entry order setting means and the actual order of entry detected by the detecting means (the function of comparing the order of winning in the MPU 612 of the notification / production control device 610); ,
A gaming machine comprising: predetermined processing execution means (a function for executing state notification by the MPU 612 of the notification / production control device 610) for executing predetermined game processing in accordance with a comparison result by the comparison means. .

  According to the feature A1, the order of entering the plurality of entering parts is monitored, and a predetermined game process is executed according to a comparison result comparing the preset order of entry with the actual order of entering. . As described above, if the game changes according to the order of entering, the monotonization of the game can be suitably suppressed.

Feature A2 (related to operating gate). A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) for launching a game ball to the game area based on a launch operation;
A starting ball entering part (acting ball entering parts 62, 63) provided in the game area (game area PE);
Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the entrance to the starting entrance part;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 604b provided in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Determination for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, information related to winning, information related to high-frequency support mode, information related to reach display) Means (for example, a function of executing the determination processing in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
When the determination result by the determination means is a corresponding result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, the gaming state is shifted to a preparation state (for example, a preparation mode) before shifting to a special gaming state (for example, an opening / closing execution mode). First transition means (function of executing transition processing to the open / close execution mode in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
Second transition means (main control) for transitioning the gaming state from the preparatory state to the special gaming state when the number of balls entered into the predetermined pitching portion in the state of the preparation state becomes a predetermined number The function of executing the transition process to the preparation mode in the MPU 602 of the apparatus 162),
A plurality of special entrance portions (for example, a left through gate 66L and a right through gate 66R) provided separately from the starting entrance portion;
A pitching order setting means (a function for setting the winning order in the MPU 612 of the notification / production control device 610) for setting the pitching order to the special pitching section;
Detecting means for detecting the order of entering the special entrance part (function of detecting the winning order in the MPU 612 of the notification / production control device 610);
Comparing means (a function for comparing the winning order by the MPU 612 of the notification / production control device 610) for comparing the entering order set by the entering order setting means and the entering order detected by the detecting means. ,
As the special game state, a first special game state and a second special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game state are provided,
The second transition means is configured to shift to the first special game state when the comparison result by the comparison means is a result in which the set entrance order matches the detected entrance order; And a means for shifting to the second special gaming state when the comparison result by the comparison means is a result in which the set entry order and the detected entry order do not match. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature A2, the type of the special game state varies depending on the order of entering the special ball-in-parts (plural) being prepared. In this way, in a gaming machine of the type that shifts to the special game state via the preparation state, it is preferable to make the game monotonous by adopting a configuration in which the subsequent development changes depending on the order of entering in the preparation state. Can be suppressed.

  Note that the “special entry portion” shown in this feature may be the same as the “predetermined entry portion”.

Feature A3 (related to operating gate). A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) for launching a game ball to the game area based on a launch operation;
A starting ball entering part (acting ball entering parts 62, 63) provided in the game area (game area PE);
Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the entrance to the starting entrance part;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 604b provided in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Determination for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, information related to winning, information related to high-frequency support mode, information related to reach display) Means (for example, a function of executing the determination processing in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
When the determination result by the determination means is a corresponding result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, the game state is set to a preparation state (for example, a preparation mode) before shifting to a special game state (for example, an opening / closing execution mode). 1 transition means (function of executing transition processing to the opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
Second transition means (main control) for transitioning the gaming state from the preparatory state to the special gaming state when the number of balls entered into the predetermined pitching portion in the state of the preparation state becomes a predetermined number A function of executing a transition process to the preparation mode in the MPU 602 of the apparatus 162),
The first entrance portion (for example, the left through gate 66L) and the second entrance portion (for example, the right through gate 66R) as the predetermined entrance portion,
A pitching order setting means (a function for setting the winning order in the MPU 612 of the notification / effect control device 610) for setting the pitching order to the first pitching part and the second pitching part;
Detecting means for detecting the order of entering the first and second entrance parts (function for detecting the order of winning in the MPU 612 of the notification / production control device 610);
Comparing means (a function for comparing the winning order by the MPU 612 of the notification / production control device 610) for comparing the entering order set by the entering order setting means and the entering order detected by the detecting means. ,
As the special game state, a first special game state and a second special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game state are provided,
The second transition means is configured to shift to the first special game state when the comparison result by the comparison means is a result in which the set entrance order matches the detected entrance order; And a means for shifting to the second special gaming state when the comparison result by the comparison means is a result in which the set entry order and the detected entry order do not match. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature A3, the type of the special gaming state changes depending on the order of entering the predetermined entrance portion being prepared. In this way, in a gaming machine of the type that shifts to the special game state via the preparation state, it is preferable to make the game monotonous by adopting a configuration in which the subsequent development changes depending on the order of entering in the preparation state. Can be suppressed.

  In particular, in order to shift to the special game state, it is essential to enter the first / second entry part, which is a predetermined entry part, and these first / second entry parts are in the order of entry. By making it a detection target, it is avoided that the effect of suppressing the above monotonization is not satisfactorily caused by the progress of the game while the game is ignored while the game is ignored. it can.

  Feature A4. The number of balls entering the predetermined pitch required for realizing the pitch order set by the pitch order setting means is equal to the predetermined number. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature A4, the number of entered balls required for the transition to the special gaming state matches the number of entered balls required for the order comparison. For this reason, when aiming at the transition to the special gaming state (when transitioning to the special gaming state), it is avoided that the number of entering balls necessary for grasping the order is insufficient. Also, since the number of balls required for the transition to the special gaming state matches the number of balls required for the order comparison, it is preferable that the comparison function of the pitch order is a factor that delays the game. Can be suppressed.

  Feature A5. The feature A3 according to the feature A3, characterized in that the number of entrances to the predetermined entrance part necessary for realizing the entrance order set by the entrance order setting means is smaller than the predetermined number. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature A5, the number of balls required for order comparison is smaller than the number of balls required for shifting to the special gaming state. For this reason, when aiming at the transition to the special gaming state (when transitioning to the special gaming state), it is possible to suitably avoid the shortage of the number of balls required for grasping the order.

Feature A6 (latency related). A first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state are provided, and it is difficult to determine whether the player is in the first gaming state or the second gaming state. Or a gaming machine provided with a means for restricting it to be impossible,
A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) for launching a game ball to the game area based on a launch operation;
A plurality of predetermined ball entering portions (for example, the left through gate 66L and the right through gate 66R) provided in the game area (game area PE),
A pitching order setting means (a function for setting a winning order in the MPU 612 of the notification / production control device 610) for setting the pitching order in the predetermined pitching portion;
Detecting means for detecting the order of entering the predetermined entrance part (function for detecting the winning order in the MPU 612 of the notification / production control device 610);
Means for comparing the order of entry set by the order-of-entry setting means and the order of entry detected by the detecting means (function for comparing the order of winning in the MPU 612 of the notification / production control device 610);
When the comparison result by the comparison means corresponds to the set entry order and the detected entry order matching, it is either the first gaming state or the second gaming state A gaming machine comprising teaching means (a function for executing state notification by the MPU 612 of the notification / production control device 610).

  If the game is stopped in the relatively advantageous first game state, the player would lose the profit that should have been originally obtained. In addition, when the game state is relatively disadvantageous, investment may increase by continuing the game. Under such circumstances, it is important to grasp which state is the first / second game state in order to advantageously advance the game. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if it is configured to teach which one of the first gaming state and the second gaming state is achieved by correctly answering in the order of entering the predetermined entry part, the information is As much as possible, the player can be encouraged to actively participate in the game (launch of game balls). Thereby, it becomes possible to suppress suitably that a game becomes monotonous.

Feature A7. A starting ball entering part (acting ball entering parts 62, 63) provided in the game area (game area PE);
Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the entrance to the starting entrance part;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 604b provided in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Determination for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, information related to winning, information related to high-frequency support mode, information related to reach display) Means (for example, a function of executing the determination processing in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
When the determination result by the determination means is a corresponding result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, the gaming state is shifted to a preparation state (for example, a preparation mode) before shifting to a special gaming state (for example, an opening / closing execution mode). First transition means (function of executing transition processing to the open / close execution mode in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
Second transition means (mainly) that transitions the gaming state from the preparatory state to the special gaming state when the number of balls entered into the predetermined pitching portion in the state of the preparation state becomes a predetermined number The function of executing the transition process to the preparation mode in the MPU 602 of the control device 162),
Third transition means (a function of executing a lottery mode switching in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the gaming state to either the first gaming state or the second gaming state after the special gaming state is ended. Prepared,
The gaming machine according to Feature A6, wherein the detection means is configured to detect the order of entering the predetermined entry portion in the preparation state.

  As shown in the feature A7, in the type of gaming machine that shifts to the special gaming state via the preparation state, there is a possibility of giving the player an impression as if the game is extended. Therefore, if the presence / absence of the benefit (state teaching) shown in the feature A6 depends on the order of entry in the preparation state, the game in the preparation state can be suitably suppressed from becoming monotonous. In addition, in order to enter the special game state, it is essential to enter the predetermined entrance areas, and by making these predetermined entrance areas to be detected in the order of entry, a lottery of teaching in the order of entry It is possible to prevent the game from proceeding while being ignored. Thereby, it can avoid that the effect which suppresses the monotonization mentioned above is not exhibited well.

Feature A8. A starting ball entering part (acting ball entering parts 62, 63) provided in the game area (game area PE);
Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the entrance to the starting entrance part;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 604b provided in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Determination for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, information related to winning, information related to high-frequency support mode, information related to reach display) Means (for example, a function of executing the determination processing in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
Transition means for transitioning the gaming state to a special gaming state (for example, the high-frequency support mode or the opening / closing execution mode) when the determination result by the determination unit is a corresponding result corresponding to the predetermined determination information;
Variable entry means provided in the game area and capable of switching between an acceptance state in which a game ball can enter and a non-acceptance state in which entry of the game ball is more difficult than the acceptance state (for example, the electric accessory 71 or the lower side) Variable winning device 64),
Drive control means (a function of executing an opening / closing process in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) for controlling the variable pitching means to switch from the non-accepting state to the accepting state when the special game state is entered; With
The gaming machine according to Feature A6, wherein the detecting means is configured to detect the order of entering the predetermined entering portion in the special gaming state.

  As shown in feature A8, in the configuration in which the variable pitching means is switched between the accepting state and the non-accepting state in the special game state, the game is monotonous because the game ball is continuously launched without any particular aim. The possibility of becoming. Therefore, if the presence or absence of the benefit (state teaching) shown in the feature A6 depends on the order of entry in the special game state, the adjustment of the launch destination of the game ball in the special game state is promoted, You can encourage attention to the destination. Thereby, it can suppress suitably that a game becomes monotonous.

Feature A9. A payout means (payout control device 181 and payout device 222) for paying out a game ball when a ball enters the variable ball entry means;
In the feature A8, the variable pitching means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched toward the predetermined pitching portion can be pitched when in the receiving state. The gaming machine described.

  In the special game state, the game balls can be paid out by entering the variable entry means. Here, aiming at the above teaching, changing the launching destination of the game ball causes the ball to enter the variable ball entry means to not be generated well, so that the player misses it. This is not preferable because it causes a decrease in game motivation.

  In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, even when a game ball is launched aiming at any predetermined ball entry portion, the ball can enter the variable ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the wasteful investment and the occurrence of spillage. That is, a game in which a game ball is paid out by entering a variable ball entry means and a game in which a game ball is entered into a predetermined ball entry portion in a desired order can be preferably coexisted.

Feature A10. The variable pitching means is arranged at a position downstream of the predetermined pitching portion in the game area,
The predetermined entry portion is configured such that a game ball that has entered the predetermined entry portion passes through the predetermined entry portion and flows down the game area. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature A10, the game ball that has entered the predetermined entrance portion can continue to flow down in the game area and enter the variable entrance means. In this way, the effect shown in the feature A9 is suitably achieved by avoiding adverse effects on the player from entering the predetermined ball-entry part and not detracting from the original enjoyment of the special game state. It can be demonstrated.

Feature A11. The game area includes a first route passing through the left side of the variable display unit and a second route passing through the right side of the variable display unit by a variable display unit (variable display unit 67) disposed in the center of the game board. And are formed,
The predetermined entrance portion has a first entrance portion where a game ball flowing down the first route can enter, and a second entrance portion where a game ball flowing down the second route can enter. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10, wherein

  In the configuration in which the subsequent deployment differs depending on the order of entering the predetermined entrance as shown in the feature A1, etc., a configuration in which the player cannot select the entrance order (for example, the order of entering the predetermined entrance) Is a random configuration regardless of the operation), the function of suppressing the monotonization is not exhibited well. In this regard, as shown in this feature, the flow path of the game ball is divided into the first route / the second route by the variable display unit, and then the first entrance to the first route and the second entrance to the second route. By disposing the ball part, the player can select a launch destination (a ball destination). If the player can select the order of entering the ball according to the player's intention, it is possible to expect an active participation in the game, and an improvement in the degree of attention to the game can be suitably realized.

Feature A12. The first pitching portion is arranged at a position where a gaming ball flowing down the second route is not allowed to enter,
The gaming machine according to Feature A11, wherein the second entering part is arranged at a position where a gaming ball flowing down the first route cannot enter.

  By separating the game ball launch destination and the ball destination as shown in the feature A12, it is possible to preferably avoid that the ball entering order is different from the player's intention.

  Feature A13. The first route and the second route are narrow on the side of the variable display portion, and the predetermined ball-entering portion is disposed in the narrowed portion. Or the gaming machine according to Feature A12.

  In a configuration in which a predetermined entrance portion as an entrance destination can be selected by the player's intention (game ball placement), active participation in the game can be expected. However, in such a configuration, it is difficult to enter the predetermined entrance portion, and there is a possibility that the willingness to play is reduced due to dissatisfaction with the entrance not occurring as expected. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if a predetermined ball entry portion is provided in a portion where the flow path is narrowed, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in the chance of entering the predetermined ball entry portion, and the above disadvantages. Occurrence can be suppressed.

Feature A14. A ball entry part into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
Provided with a privilege granting means (for example, a function of acquiring a power role reservation or a function of paying out a game ball) that grants a privilege to a player when a ball enters the ball club,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13, wherein the predetermined entrance portion is configured by the entrance portion.

  In the game area, various game parts are arranged in a limited area. Here, if it is going to newly install a ball entrance part in order to apply the technical idea shown to the feature A1 etc., the arrangement | positioning area | region of other game parts will be pressed. The game area is generally provided with a pitching portion such as a general winning opening. By making it possible to use the entrance portion having such other functions as the predetermined entrance portion, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of inconvenience related to the above arrangement.

Feature A15. In the game area, a general entrance part is provided in addition to the start entrance part,
The general pitching part is a pitching part in which the determination is not performed even if a game ball enters,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A14, wherein the predetermined entrance portion is configured by the general entrance portion.

  In the game area, various game parts are arranged in a limited area. Here, if it is going to newly install a ball entrance part in order to apply the technical idea shown to the feature A1 etc., the arrangement | positioning area | region of other game parts will be pressed. The game area is generally provided with a pitching portion such as a general winning opening. By making it possible to use the entrance portion having such other functions as the predetermined entrance portion, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of inconvenience related to the above arrangement.

  In addition, it is preferable to set it as the structure provided with the payout means which pays out a game ball based on the entrance to a general entrance part. In particular, in a combination with a configuration that shifts to the special game state via the preparation state, there is a possibility that the game balls on hand are insufficient at the start of the special game state by consuming the game balls in the preparation state. In this regard, if the general ball entering part is set as the predetermined ball entering part and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entering the general ball entering part, there is a shortage of game balls at the time of transition to the special game state. Can be suitably suppressed, and the game progress can be facilitated.

Feature A16. The entrance order setting means is for setting the entrance order when a predetermined situation occurs,
The detection means starts detection of the order of entering the predetermined entrance portion based on the setting made by the entrance order setting means.
The features A1 to A1, wherein the setting by the entering order setting unit and the entering order detected by the detecting unit are deleted when the comparison by the comparing unit is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of A14.

  When setting, detecting and comparing the order of entry, it is possible to realize diversification of the game, but on the other hand, it becomes a factor that increases the processing load or the game becomes overly complicated and annoying the player. There is concern about becoming. This hinders the adoption of the function. Therefore, as shown in this feature, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of such various inconveniences by limiting the execution order setting, detection, and comparison only when a predetermined situation occurs. .

<Feature B group> Relationship between difficulty of entering and benefits Feature B1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) for launching a game ball to the game area with a launch intensity corresponding to a launch operation by a player;
A first pitching portion (for example, a left general winning opening 61L) and a second pitching portion (for example, a right general winning port 61R) provided in the gaming area and capable of entering gaming balls;
Benefit granting means for granting a player a privilege based on the entrance to the first entrance and the second entrance (for example, a function for determining the number of rounds in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162, and notification / production) A function of performing status notification in the MPU 612 of the control device 610),
Game state transition means (for example, a function for executing a transition process in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that shifts the gaming state to a predetermined gaming state (for example, a preparation mode or an opening / closing execution mode) when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied. And
The first entrance part is arranged at a position where entrance is more difficult than the second entrance part,
In the situation where the gaming state is the predetermined gaming state, the privilege granting unit is configured such that a privilege given to the player based on the entrance to the first entrance part is given to the second entrance part. A gaming machine that is configured to be larger than a privilege given to a player based on the incoming ball.

  According to the feature B1, in a predetermined gaming state, if the game ball is launched aiming at the relatively difficult first entrance part, the entry is difficult to occur, but the entry is relatively You can get big benefits. On the other hand, if a game ball is launched aiming at a relatively low second entrance portion, the bonus obtained is relatively small even if the entrance ball is generated instead of entering the entrance ball. By making the selection possible by entering a predetermined game state, monotonization of the game can be suitably suppressed.

Feature B2. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) for launching a game ball to the game area with a launch intensity corresponding to a launch operation by a player;
A predetermined ball portion (for example, the left general winning port 61L and the right general winning port 61R) provided in the gaming area and into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Based on the entrance to the predetermined entrance part, the game state transition means (for example, the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) for shifting the game state to a special game state (for example, opening / closing execution mode) more advantageous to the player than usual. Function to execute the migration process)
As the predetermined pitching portion, a first pitching portion (for example, the left general winning opening 61L) in which a gaming ball flowing down a first route (for example, the left route) provided in the gaming region can be pitched, and the gaming region A second pitching portion (for example, the right general winning opening 61R) in which a game ball flowing down the second route (for example, the right route) provided in
The first entrance part is arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the second route is difficult or impossible to enter,
The second pitching portion is arranged at a position where a gaming ball flowing down the first route is difficult or impossible to enter,
A probability that a game ball flowing down the first route enters the first ball entering portion is higher than a probability that the game ball flowing down the second route enters the second ball entering portion. Configured,
As the special game state, there are a first special game state (for example, an opening / closing execution mode corresponding to 8R) and a second special game state (for example, an opening / closing execution mode corresponding to 16R) more advantageous to the player than the first special game state. Provided,
The gaming state transition means includes a means for transitioning to the first special gaming state when a ball enters the first pitching portion in a predetermined gaming state (for example, in the preparation mode), And a means for shifting to the second special game state when a ball enters the ball portion.

  According to the feature B2, in a predetermined gaming state, if the game ball is launched aiming at the relatively difficult first entrance part, the entry is not likely to occur, but the entry is relatively A large privilege (transition to the second special gaming state) can be obtained. On the other hand, if a game ball is launched aiming at a relatively low difficulty second entrance part, it is easy to generate an entry instead of entering a bonus (to the first special gaming state) Transition) is relatively small. By making the selection possible by entering a predetermined game state, monotonization of the game can be suitably suppressed.

Feature B3. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) for launching a game ball to the game area with a launch intensity corresponding to a launch operation by a player;
A starting ball entering part (acting ball entering parts 62, 63) provided in the game area (game area PE);
Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the entrance to the starting entrance part;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 604b provided in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Determination for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, information related to winning, information related to high-frequency support mode, information related to reach display) Means (for example, a function of executing the determination processing in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
When the determination result by the determination means is a corresponding result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, the game state is set to a preparation state (for example, a preparation mode) before shifting to a special game state (for example, an opening / closing execution mode). 1 transition means (function of executing transition processing to the opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
Second transition means for transitioning the gaming state from the preparation state to the special gaming state when the predetermined transition condition is established in the preparation state (execution of transition processing to the preparation mode by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) Function)
A predetermined ball portion (for example, a general winning opening 61) provided in the game area,
As the predetermined entrance part, a first entrance part that can enter a game ball flowing down the first route provided in the game area, and a game ball down the second route provided in the game area are provided. Having a second entrance portion that can enter,
The first entrance part is arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the second route is difficult or impossible to enter,
The second pitching portion is arranged at a position where a gaming ball flowing down the first route is difficult or impossible to enter,
A probability that a game ball flowing down the first route enters the first ball entering portion is higher than a probability that the game ball flowing down the second route enters the second ball entering portion. Configured,
As the special game state, a first special game state and a second special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game state are provided,
When entering into the first entering part occurs in the state of the preparation state, the first special gaming state is entered, and entering into the second entering part occurs. Is configured to be in the second special gaming state.

  According to the feature B3, in the case of shifting to the special game state based on the entrance to the starting entrance portion, the preparation state is passed as a previous stage. In the preparatory state, if a game ball is launched aiming at a relatively difficult first entrance part, the entry is not likely to occur, but instead a relatively large privilege (second special game state) Can be acquired). On the other hand, if a game ball is launched aiming at a relatively low difficulty second entrance part, it is easy to generate an entry instead of entering a bonus (to the first special gaming state) Transition) is relatively small. By enabling the selection during the preparation state, monotonization of the game in the preparation state can be suitably suppressed.

  Feature B4. The second transition means is configured to shift the gaming state from the preparation state to the special gaming state based on a ball entering the predetermined pitching portion in the preparation state. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature B4, in the preparation state, a transition to the special game state is made based on the entry to the predetermined entry portion. In other words, the transition to the special game state is avoided until the entry to the predetermined entry portion occurs. Thereby, it can suppress that the effect which concerns on the diversification of the game shown to characteristic B3 is not exhibited well.

  The structure shown in this feature is “a game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed” and a game ball is launched into the game area at a launch intensity corresponding to a launch operation by the player. For game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110), starting ball entering portions (acting ball entering portions 62, 63) provided in the game region (game region PE), and entering the starting ball entering portion Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that acquires special information (holding information) based on the information acquisition means (acquisition information storage means that can store the special information acquired by the information acquisition means) The reserved ball storage area 604b provided in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 and the special information stored in the acquired information storage means are predetermined determination information (for example, information related to winning, high frequency support mode) Determination information (for example, a function for executing the determination processing or the like in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and a determination result by the determination means First transition means (main control device 162) that sets the gaming state to a preparatory state (for example, a preparatory mode) before transitioning to a special gaming state (for example, an opening / closing execution mode) when a corresponding result corresponding to predetermined determination information is obtained. Of the MPU 602 to execute the process of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode), a predetermined ball portion (for example, a general winning opening 61) provided in the game area, and the predetermined ball portion in the preparatory state. The second transition means (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes the transition process to the preparation mode) that transitions the gaming state from the preparation state to the special gaming state when a ball enters. And a second entrance provided in the game area, and a second entrance provided in the game area. The first entrance section is configured to allow a game ball flowing down the first route provided in the game area. A second pitching portion into which a game ball flowing down the route can enter, and the first pitching portion is arranged at a position where the game ball flowing down the second route is difficult or impossible to enter. And the second entrance part is arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the first route becomes difficult or impossible to enter, and the first entrance of the game ball flowing down the first route The probability of entering the club is configured to be higher than the probability of entering the second bowl of game balls flowing down the second route, and the first special game state is set as the special game state. A state and a second special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special gaming state, The first special game state is entered when a first ball entry occurs, and the second special game state is entered when a second ball entry occurs. A gaming machine characterized by being made. Can also be used.

Feature B5. In the game area, a special entrance portion (for example, a through gate 66) is provided separately from the predetermined entrance portion,
The second transition means is configured to transition a gaming state from the preparation state to the special gaming state when a transition condition is established based on a ball entering the special pitching unit in the preparation state. And
The gaming machine according to feature B3, wherein a probability of entering the special entrance portion is higher than a probability of entering the predetermined entrance portion.

  If a special entry part with a probability of entry is provided rather than a predetermined entry part and the structure allows the player to enter the special game state based on the entry to the special entry part, the game in the ready state becomes excessively difficult. Can be suppressed.

Feature B6. As the special game state, a third special game state is provided,
Based on the entrance to the predetermined entrance part, the transition condition based on entering the special entrance part is established before the transition condition to the first special game state or the second special game state is established. And a means for transitioning the gaming state to the third special gaming state,
The special entrance portion and the predetermined entrance portion are configured such that a game ball launched toward the special entrance portion can enter the predetermined entrance portion and is launched toward the predetermined entrance portion. Played game balls can enter the special entrance club,
The gaming machine according to feature B5, wherein a probability of entering the special entrance portion is higher than a probability of entering the predetermined entrance portion.

  If there is a difference in the probability of entering the first and second balls, the game will be prolonged if no balls are entered into the first and second balls. It will be. This makes it easier to give the player the impression that the transition to the special gaming state is unnecessarily delayed. Therefore, as shown in this feature, it is configured such that a game ball aimed at any predetermined entrance part (first entrance part / second entrance part) can enter the special entrance part, and the special entrance If it is set as the structure which transfers to a special game state (3rd special game state) when transition conditions are satisfied based on the entrance to a ball | bowl part, the above-mentioned delay can be suppressed suitably.

Feature B7. As the special game state, a third special game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first special game state and the second special game state is provided,
Based on the entrance to the predetermined entrance part, the transition condition based on entering the special entrance part is established before the transition condition to the first special game state or the second special game state is established. And a means for transitioning the gaming state to the third special gaming state,
The special entrance portion and the predetermined entrance portion are configured such that a game ball launched toward the special entrance portion can enter the predetermined entrance portion and is launched toward the predetermined entrance portion. Played game balls can enter the special entrance club,
The gaming machine according to feature B5, wherein a probability of entering the special entrance portion is higher than a probability of entering the predetermined entrance portion.

  If there is a difference in the probability of entering the first and second balls, the game will be prolonged if no balls are entered into the first and second balls. It will be. This makes it easier to give the player the impression that the transition to the special gaming state is unnecessarily delayed. Therefore, as shown in this feature, it is configured such that a game ball aimed at any predetermined entrance part (first entrance part / second entrance part) can enter the special entrance part, and the special entrance If it is set as the structure which transfers to a special game state (3rd special game state) when transition conditions are satisfied based on the entrance to a ball | bowl part, the above-mentioned delay can be suppressed suitably.

  Here, with respect to the third special game state, a difference is provided so as to be more disadvantageous to the player than the first special game state and the second special game state. For this reason, in a preparation state, a game ball will be launched aiming at a predetermined entrance part, expecting that the entrance to a special entrance part will be avoided. With such a configuration, the novelty of the game can be enhanced.

Feature B8. In the game area, a general entrance part is provided in addition to the start entrance part,
The general pitching part is a pitching part in which the determination is not performed even if a game ball enters,
The gaming machine according to any one of features B3 to B7, wherein the predetermined entrance portion is configured by the general entrance portion.

  In the game area, various game parts are arranged in a limited area. Here, if it is going to newly install a ball entrance part in order to apply the technical idea shown in the feature B3 or the like, the placement area of other game parts will be pressed. The game area is generally provided with a pitching portion such as a general winning opening. By making it possible to use the entrance portion having such other functions as the predetermined entrance portion, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of inconvenience related to the above arrangement.

  Feature B9. The gaming machine according to Feature B8, further comprising payout means (payout control device 181 and payout device 222) for paying out game balls based on the entry into the general ball entry portion.

  In the combination with the configuration for shifting to the special game state via the preparation state, there is a possibility that the game balls on hand will be insufficient at the start of the special game state by consuming the game balls in the preparation state. In this regard, if the general ball entering part is set as the predetermined ball entering part and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entering the general ball entering part, there is a shortage of game balls at the time of transition to the special game state. Can be suitably suppressed, and the game progress can be facilitated.

  Feature B10. In the case where entrance to the first entrance portion and the second entrance portion occurs simultaneously, priority is given to entering the second entrance portion over entering the first entrance portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B9, comprising priority means.

  In the configuration in which game balls are divided into the first route and the second route, it is impossible to deny the possibility that the game balls are fired together on two routes due to an operation error or the like. Here, as shown in this feature, if it is configured that priority is given to entering the second entrance with a relatively large privilege, entry into the first entrance and the second entrance due to a mistake or the like is assumed. Even when balls are generated at the same time, it is possible to suitably avoid inconveniences such as a privilege that should originally be obtained due to the ball. This is a preferable configuration for suppressing a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

<Feature C group> Two games proceeding in parallel Feature C1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) for launching a game ball to the game area with a launch intensity corresponding to a launch operation by a player;
Game state transition means for shifting the game state to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than usual when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 shifts to the opening / closing execution mode or the high frequency support mode) Function)
Variable entry means (variable winning devices 64, 65 and electric winning devices, which are provided in the game area and can be switched between an accepting state in which a game ball can enter and a non-accepting state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the accepted state. An accessory 71),
Drive control means (function of executing drive control by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for driving control so that the variable pitching means is switched from the non-accepting state to the accepting state when the special game state is entered; ,
A payout means (payout control device 181 or payout device 222) for paying out a game ball when a ball enters the variable ball entry means;
A first entry portion (for example, the left through gate 66L or the left general winning opening 61L) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the first route (eg, the left route) formed in the game area. When,
A second entry part (for example, a right through gate 66R or a right general winning opening 61R) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down a second route (for example, the right route) formed in the game area. And
The first entrance part is arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the second route is difficult or impossible to enter,
The second pitching portion is arranged at a position where a gaming ball flowing down the first route is difficult or impossible to enter,
First privilege granting means for granting a player a first privilege based on the occurrence of a ball entering the first ball-throwing portion under the special gaming state;
Second privilege granting means for granting a player a second privilege different from the first privilege based on the occurrence of a ball entering the second ball-throwing part under the special gaming state. And
The game machine characterized in that the variable ball entry means is arranged at a position where any of the game balls flowing down the first route and the second route can enter the variable ball entry means.

  According to the feature C1, by shifting to the special game state, the variable ball entry means is switched from the non-acceptance state to the reception state, and the entry into the variable ball entry means is facilitated. Under such circumstances, the game ball that is launched aiming at the variable ball entry means enters the variable ball entry means, so that the game ball is paid out. Here, in the special game state, the provision of the first privilege based on the entrance to the first entrance portion and the provision of the second privilege based on the entrance to the second entrance portion are effective. In this situation, the player is prompted to select whether to aim at the first pitching portion to enjoy the first privilege or to aim at the second pitching portion to enjoy the second privilege. In other words, in the special game state, the first privilege is obtained by selecting a game in which a game ball is entered into the variable ball entry means to obtain a ball, and a ball destination is selected from the first ball entry unit / second ball entry unit. And the game of aiming at either of the 2nd privilege will be performed in parallel. Thereby, the monotonization of the game in a special game state can be suppressed, and it can contribute to the improvement of the attention degree to a game.

  The structure shown in this feature is “a game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed” and a game ball is launched into the game area at a launch intensity corresponding to a launch operation by the player. A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110), a game board (game board 60) on which the game area (game area PE) is formed, and a launch intensity corresponding to a launch operation by the player to the game area. Game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) for launching a game ball, and game state transition means for shifting the game state to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than usual when a predetermined transition condition is established. , A variable ball entry means provided in the gaming area and capable of switching between an accepting state in which a game ball can enter and a non-accepting state in which entering of the game ball is more difficult than the accepting state, and transition to the special gaming state If you have said variable pitch Drive control means for driving and controlling the stage to switch from the non-acceptance state to the acceptance state, and a payout means for paying out a game ball when a ball enters the variable ball entry means. A first pitching portion that is provided in the area and into which a game ball flowing down the first route formed in the game area can enter, and a second route provided in the game area and formed in the game area. A second pitching portion into which a flowing game ball can enter, and the first pitching portion is arranged at a position where the game ball flowing down the second route is difficult or impossible to enter. The second pitching portion is arranged at a position where the game balls flowing down the first route are difficult or impossible to enter, and the first pitching is performed in the special gaming state. A first that gives the player a first privilege based on the occurrence of a ball entering the club The player is given a second privilege different from the first privilege based on the fact that the player has entered a ball into the second ball-entry unit under the special gaming state. A second privilege granting means; and a privilege granting regulation means for restricting the granting of a privilege by the first privilege granting means and the second privilege granting means in a situation where the special gaming state is not established; The game machine is characterized in that the ball means is arranged at a position where any of the game balls flowing down the first route and the second route can enter the variable ball entry means. It is also possible.

Feature C2. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) for launching a game ball to the game area with a launch intensity corresponding to a launch operation by a player;
A game board (game board 60) in which the game area (game area PE) is formed;
Game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) for launching a game ball to the game area with a launch intensity corresponding to a launch operation by a player;
When a predetermined transition condition is established, the game state transition means (for example, the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) shifts the game state to a special game state (for example, an opening / closing execution mode or a high frequency support mode) more advantageous to the player than usual. Function to execute the migration process)
Variable entry means (for example, variable prize winning devices 64, 65, etc.) provided in the gaming area and capable of switching between an accepting state in which a game ball can enter and a non-accepting state in which a game ball is difficult to enter than in the accepting state. Electric accessory 71),
Drive control means (a function of performing drive control by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for driving control so that the variable pitching means is switched from the non-accepting state to the accepting state when transitioning to the special game state;
A payout means (payout control device 181 or payout device 222) for paying out a game ball when a ball enters the variable ball entry means;
A first entry portion (for example, the left through gate 66L or the left general winning opening 61L) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the first route (eg, the left route) formed in the game area. When,
A second entry part (for example, a right through gate 66R or a right general winning opening 61R) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down a second route (for example, the right route) formed in the game area. And
The first entrance part is arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the second route is difficult or impossible to enter,
The second pitching portion is arranged at a position where a gaming ball flowing down the first route is difficult or impossible to enter,
Setting means for setting one of the first and second balls as a specific ball according to the game situation;
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player when a ball enters the specific ball set set by the setting means under the situation of the special gaming state;
The game machine characterized in that the variable ball entry means is arranged at a position where any of the game balls flowing down the first route and the second route can enter the variable ball entry means.

  According to the feature C2, by shifting to the special game state, the variable ball entry means is switched from the non-acceptance state to the reception state, and the entry into the variable ball entry means is facilitated. Under such circumstances, the game ball that is launched aiming at the variable ball entry means enters the variable ball entry means, so that the game ball is paid out. Here, in a special gaming state, when a ball enters a specific ball set that is set in advance among the first ball portion and the second ball portion, a privilege is given to the player. In other words, in the special game state, a game in which a game ball is entered into the variable entry means to obtain an exit ball, and a destination is selected from the first entry part / second entry part to receive a privilege. The game of aiming will be performed in parallel. Thereby, the monotonization of the game in a special game state can be suppressed, and it can contribute to the improvement of the attention degree to a game.

  Feature C3. The gaming machine according to Feature C1 or Feature C2, wherein the first entrance portion and the second entrance portion are arranged at positions upstream of the variable entrance means.

  According to the feature C3, since the variable pitching means is on the downstream side of the first pitching portion and the second pitching portion, the presence of the variable pitching means is the first pitching portion or the second pitching portion. It is possible to avoid an obstacle that prevents the player from entering the club. Thereby, it can suppress suitably that the game of aiming at a 1st entrance part and a 2nd entrance part is prevented.

  Feature C4. The gaming machine according to Feature C3, wherein the gaming balls that have entered the first and second entering parts are configured to flow down the gaming area as they are.

  According to the feature C4, the game balls that have entered the first and second entrance parts pass through the first and second entrance parts and go to the variable entry means. In other words, there is room for the game balls that have entered the first and second entrance parts to enter the variable entry means. Thereby, it can suppress suitably that progress of the game in a special game state is delayed uselessly.

Feature C5. The drive control means is configured to perform drive control so that the variable pitching means is alternately switched between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state,
The first privilege granting unit is configured to grant a privilege when a ball enters the first ball entry unit in a situation where the variable ball entry unit is in the receiving state. The second privilege granting unit is configured to grant a privilege when a ball enters the second ball entry unit in a state where the variable ball entry unit is in the receiving state. The gaming machine according to Feature C3 or Feature C4, characterized by

  When the variable pitching means is in the accepting state, it is easy to enter the variable pitching means, and game balls are paid out by entering the variable pitching means. That is, it is possible to suppress investment when playing a game. Under such circumstances, if it is configured to prompt the selection to the first and second pitching parts, the occurrence of inconvenience such as unnecessarily large investment due to the complexity of the game mode is suppressed, It is preferable for encouraging active participation in new games.

Note that the configuration shown in this feature is “the drive control means is configured to perform drive control so that the variable pitching means is alternately switched between the receiving state and the non-receiving state,
The privilege granting unit is configured to grant the privilege when a ball enters the specific ball entry unit in a state where the variable ball entry unit is in the receiving state. The gaming machine according to the feature C3 or the feature C4. Can also be used.

  Feature C6. The game machine according to Feature C1 or Feature C2, wherein the first and second ball entry portions are arranged at positions downstream of the variable ball entry means.

  According to the feature C6, since the variable pitching means is on the upstream side of the first pitching portion and the second pitching portion, the presence of the variable pitching means is the first pitching portion and the second pitching location. It becomes an obstacle that prevents entering the club. Thereby, when it is going to enjoy the privilege based on the entrance to the 1st entrance part or the 2nd entrance part, it will be necessary to play a game so that the entrance to a variable entrance means may be avoided. . In this way, in a special game state, a game that aims at the variable ball entry means and a game that avoids the variable acquisition means are generated, so that an unprecedented novel game can be provided. This is preferable in order to suppress the monotonization of the game and improve the degree of attention to the game.

  Feature C7. The feature C6 is characterized in that the game ball that has flowed into the variable pitching means is discharged from the game area and is restricted from flowing along the first route and the second route. Game machines.

  According to the feature C7, the game ball that has entered the variable pitching means does not enter the first pitching portion or the second pitching portion. Thereby, the effect shown to the characteristic C5 can be exhibited suitably.

Feature C8. The drive control means is configured to perform drive control so that the variable pitching means is alternately switched between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state,
The first privilege granting unit is configured to grant a privilege when a ball enters the first ball entry unit in a state where the variable ball entry unit is in the non-acceptance state. The second privilege granting unit is configured to grant a privilege when a ball enters the second ball entry unit in a state where the variable ball entry unit is in the non-acceptance state. The gaming machine according to Feature C5 or Feature C6, wherein:

  When the variable pitching means is in a non-accepting state (for example, an interval period), it is difficult to enter the variable pitching means. During such a period, the degree of attention to the game tends to be lower than the period in which the variable pitching means is in the receiving state. Thus, by generating a new game shown in the feature C1 or the like using the period of non-acceptance state, it is possible to suitably suppress a reduction in the degree of attention.

  Further, in the non-acceptance state, since the entrance to the first entrance portion and the second entrance portion is not disturbed by the variable entrance means, the game ball is paid out by entering the variable entrance means. A game that obtains a bonus and a game that obtains a privilege by selecting one of the first and second pitching parts can be suitably combined.

  Note that the configuration shown in this feature is “the drive control means is configured to perform drive control so that the variable pitching means is alternately switched between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state, and the privilege granting is performed. The means is characterized in that a privilege is given when a ball enters the specific ball portion under the situation where the variable ball entry means is in the non-acceptance state. The gaming machine described in the feature C5 or the feature C6. "

<Characteristic D group> Development changes depending on whether or not a predetermined event occurs before passing through the operation gate. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) for launching a game ball to the game area with a launch intensity corresponding to a launch operation by a player;
A game board (game board 60) in which the game area (game area PE) is formed;
Game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) for launching a game ball to the game area with a launch intensity corresponding to a launch operation by a player;
A starting ball entering part (acting ball entering parts 62, 63) provided in the game area (game area PE);
Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the entrance to the starting entrance part;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 604b provided in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Determination for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, information related to winning, information related to high-frequency support mode, information related to reach display) Means (for example, a function of executing the determination processing in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
When the determination result by the determination means is a corresponding result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, the gaming state is shifted to a preparation state (for example, a preparation mode) before shifting to a special gaming state (for example, an opening / closing execution mode). First transition means (function of executing transition processing to the open / close execution mode in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
Second transition means for transitioning the gaming state from the preparation state to the special gaming state when the predetermined transition condition is established in the preparation state (execution of transition processing to the preparation mode by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) Function)
If a special event based on a player's operation occurs before the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, a predetermined game process is executed, and the special event does not occur before the predetermined transition condition is satisfied In some cases, the game machine is provided with a game process execution means that does not execute the predetermined game process.

  According to the feature D1, when the transition to the special game state is determined by the determination based on the entrance to the starting entrance portion, first, the transition is made to the preparation state. Then, based on the fact that a predetermined transition condition is established in this preparation state, the special gaming state is switched. If a special event based on the player's operation occurs before the transition condition to the special gaming state is established, a predetermined game process is executed, and if no special event occurs, the predetermined game process is executed. The difference is that they are not. Thereby, development of subsequent games can be diversified. Further, if the operation in the preparation state determines whether or not the predetermined game process can be executed, monotonization of the game in the preparation state can be suitably suppressed.

  The structure shown in this feature is “a game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed” and a game ball is launched into the game area at a launch intensity corresponding to a launch operation by the player. A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110), a game board (game board 60) on which the game area (game area PE) is formed, and a launch intensity corresponding to a launch operation by the player to the game area. Game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) for launching a game ball, a starting ball entering portion (acting ball entering portions 62, 63) provided in the game area (game area PE), and the starting ball entering portion Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that acquires special information (holding information) based on the entry of the ball, and acquisition that can store the special information acquired by the information acquisition means Information storage means (main system The reserved ball storage area 604b provided in the MPU 602 of the apparatus 162 and the special information stored in the acquired information storage means are predetermined determination information (for example, information related to winning, information related to high frequency support mode, reach display) And the determination result by the determination unit is included in the predetermined determination information (for example, a function for executing the determination process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162). When a corresponding response result is obtained, the first transition means (opening / closing by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) sets the game state to a preparation state (for example, preparation mode) before shifting to the special game state (for example, opening / closing execution mode). A function for executing a transition process to the execution mode) and a predetermined transition condition in the preparation state, whether the gaming state is the preparation state Second transition means for transitioning to the special gaming state (function of executing transition processing to the preparation mode by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and a predetermined ball that is provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter And the predetermined transition condition is established based on the entrance to the predetermined entrance portion, and a predetermined event occurs when a special event occurs before the predetermined transition condition is established. A game process executing means that executes the predetermined game process when the special event does not occur before the predetermined transition condition is satisfied. It is also possible to use “machine”.

Feature D2. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) for launching a game ball to the game area with a launch intensity corresponding to a launch operation by a player;
A starting ball entering part (acting ball entering parts 62, 63) provided in the game area (game area PE);
Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the entrance to the starting entrance part;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 604b provided in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Determination for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, information related to winning, information related to high-frequency support mode, information related to reach display) Means (for example, a function of executing the determination processing in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
When the determination result by the determination means is a corresponding result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, the game state is set to a preparation state (for example, a preparation mode) before shifting to a special game state (for example, an opening / closing execution mode). 1 transition means (function of executing transition processing to the opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
Second transition means for transitioning the gaming state from the preparation state to the special gaming state when the predetermined transition condition is established in the preparation state (execution of transition processing to the preparation mode by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) Function)
Provided in a predetermined flow path formed in the game area, and provided with a predetermined ball entry portion into which a game ball can enter,
The predetermined transition condition is established based on the entrance to the predetermined entrance part,
A special entrance part that is arranged in the predetermined flow path and into which a game ball can enter,
If a special event based on the entrance to the special pitching portion occurs before the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, a predetermined game process is executed, and the special event is performed before the predetermined transition condition is satisfied. A gaming machine comprising: a game process execution means that does not execute the predetermined game process when no occurrence occurs.

  According to the feature D2, when the transition to the special game state is determined by the determination based on the entrance to the starting entrance portion, first, the transition is made to the preparation state. Then, based on the fact that a predetermined transition condition is established in this preparation state, the special gaming state is switched. If a special event based on the player's operation occurs before the transition condition to the special gaming state is established, a predetermined game process is executed, and if no special event occurs, the predetermined game process is executed. The difference is that they are not. Thereby, development of subsequent games can be diversified. In addition, if a configuration in which whether or not to execute a predetermined game process is determined depending on the game ball entering state in the preparation state, monotonization of the game in the preparation state can be suitably suppressed. If the launch destination of the game ball is a predetermined flow path, aiming at one of the special ball entrance portion and the predetermined ball entrance portion inevitably causes entry into the other. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being delayed unnecessarily by realizing a new game as described above.

  Feature D3. The game machine according to Feature D2, wherein the special ball entry portion is disposed downstream of the predetermined ball entry portion in the predetermined flow path.

  According to the feature D3, the special entrance portion is located downstream of the predetermined entrance portion. For this reason, it is assumed that a player who expects to execute a predetermined game process will play a game in the hope that no ball will enter the predetermined ball-entry part. This makes it possible to realize an innovative gameplay that has never been seen before.

  It is also possible to reverse the positional relationship between the special entrance portion and the predetermined entrance portion. In this case, a game ball aimed at the predetermined entrance portion is entered into the special entrance portion before the predetermined entrance portion. In other words, even if a special entry part is aimed, the entry to a predetermined entry part may occur (establishment of a predetermined transition condition) without generating even a chance to enter the special entry part. Can be suppressed.

Feature D4. The second transition means transitions the gaming state to the special gaming state when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied when the number of balls entering the predetermined pitching portion reaches a predetermined number which is a plurality of numbers. And
The predetermined entrance portion is configured such that a game ball that has entered the predetermined entrance portion passes through the predetermined entrance portion and flows down the predetermined flow path. Or the gaming machine described in the feature D3.

  If the predetermined entrance area is located upstream of the special entrance area, even if it is aimed at the special entrance area, even a chance to enter the special entrance area may occur. If a ball enters the predetermined ball entry portion (predetermined transition condition is established), there is a concern that the player's willingness to play will drop at once. In this regard, as shown in this feature, it is assumed that a plurality of balls are generated at a predetermined ball entry part under a predetermined transition condition, and a game ball that has passed through the predetermined ball entry part enters the special ball entry part. By leaving the possibility of spheres, the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

  Feature D5. The gaming machine according to any one of features D2 to D4, further comprising variable means for changing the predetermined number in accordance with a result of determination by the determination means.

  According to the feature D5, superiority or inferiority between establishment of a predetermined transition condition and occurrence of a special event can be changed each time. This can contribute to further diversification of games.

Feature D6. As the special game state, a first special game state and a second special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game state are provided,
The gaming process execution means sets the first special gaming state as a transition destination by the second transition means when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied without occurrence of the special event, and the predetermined transition condition Any of the features D2 to D5, wherein the second special game state is set as a transition destination by the second transition means when the special event occurs before the establishment of The gaming machine according to one.

  According to the feature D6, the type of the special game state that becomes the transition destination changes depending on the presence or absence of a special event in the preparation state. In this way, by strengthening the relationship between the preparation state and the special game state, it is possible to suitably exhibit the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game.

Feature D7. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) for launching a game ball to the game area with a launch intensity corresponding to a launch operation by a player;
A starting ball entering part (acting ball entering parts 62, 63) provided in the game area (game area PE);
Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the entrance to the starting entrance part;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 604b provided in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Determination for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, information related to winning, information related to high-frequency support mode, information related to reach display) Means (for example, a function of executing the determination processing in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
When the determination result by the determination means is a corresponding result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, the game state is set to a preparation state (for example, a preparation mode) before shifting to a special game state (for example, an opening / closing execution mode). 1 transition means (function of executing transition processing to the opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
Second transition means for transitioning the gaming state from the preparation state to the special gaming state when the predetermined transition condition is established in the preparation state (execution of transition processing to the preparation mode by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) Function)
Provided in a predetermined flow path formed in the game area, and provided with a predetermined ball entry portion into which a game ball can enter,
The predetermined transition condition is established based on the entrance to the predetermined entrance part,
The predetermined flow path has a first route passing through the left side of the variable display unit (variable display unit 67) disposed in the center of the game board and a second route passing through the right side of the variable display unit. And
The first route is provided with a first special entry portion where a game ball flowing down the first route can enter, and a game ball flowing down the second route can enter the second route The second special entrance part is arranged,
The first special entry portion is configured to be easier to enter than the second special entry portion,
As the special game state, the first special game state, the second special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game state, and the first special game state and the second special game state are more disadvantageous to the player. A third special gaming state is provided,
The second transition means determines the gaming state based on the fact that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied when a ball enters the first special pitching portion before the predetermined transition condition is satisfied. Based on the means for shifting to the first special gaming state and the fact that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied when a ball enters the second special pitching section before the predetermined transition condition is satisfied Based on means for transitioning the gaming state to the second special gaming state, and that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied without entering the first special pitching portion and the second special pitching portion. And a means for shifting the gaming state to the third special gaming state.

  In the ready state, the player can select whether to aim at the first special entrance portion that is relatively easy to enter and the second special entrance portion that is relatively difficult to enter. Regardless of which special entry part is aimed, the game can be advantageously advanced by generating an entry to the special entry part before entering the predetermined entry part, The advantage is higher when entering the second special entrance part, and the possibility of entering the special entrance part is higher in the first special entrance part. . With such a configuration, diversification of games can be realized, and monotonization of games in the ready state can be suitably suppressed.

  Further, in such a configuration, there is a possibility that the preparation state is unnecessarily prolonged when the entrance into the first special entrance portion or the second special entrance portion does not occur well. In this way, the prolonged game can be a factor that reduces the degree of attention to the game. In this regard, as shown in this feature, it is preferable that the delay as described above occurs by leaving any room for entering the predetermined entrance portion, regardless of which special entrance portion is aimed. Can be suppressed.

  The technical ideas shown in the features D2 to D6 can be applied to the feature D7.

<Characteristic E group> Comparison of the number of entrances in a plurality of entrance parts Feature E1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) for launching a game ball to the game area with a launch intensity corresponding to a launch operation by a player;
A first entrance part (for example, the left through gate 66L and the left general winning opening 61L) and a second entrance part (for example, the right through gate 66R and the right general winning opening 61R) that are provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter. )When,
A first storage means (for example, a function for storing the number of winnings in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) that stores the number of balls that have entered the first pitching section when in a predetermined state;
A second storage means (for example, a function for storing the number of winnings in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) for storing the number of entering the second entering portion when the predetermined state is reached;
When a predetermined comparison condition is satisfied, the number of entrances to the first entrance part stored by the first storage unit and the entrance to the second entrance part stored by the second storage unit A comparison means for comparing numbers (for example, a comparison function in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
A gaming machine comprising game processing execution means (for example, a function for determining the number of rounds by the MPU of the main control device 162) for executing a predetermined game process based on a comparison result by the comparison means.

  According to the feature E1, a predetermined game process is executed based on a comparison result of the number of balls entered into the first and second balls. By adopting a configuration in which the comparison result of the number of entered balls is reflected in the game, it can contribute to diversification of the game.

Feature E2. The predetermined number is plural,
In the game area, a first route passing through the left side of the variable display unit (variable display unit 67) disposed in the center of the game board and a second route passing through the right side of the variable display unit are formed. Has been
The gaming machine according to Feature E1, wherein the first entrance portion is disposed on the first route, and the second entrance portion is disposed on the second route.

  According to the configuration shown in the feature E2, the player can select a desired destination for the game by placing the game balls into the first route / second route. Here, the firing speed (launch strength) of the game ball is generally determined by the amount of operation of one operation member, and there is a high possibility that the game ball will be fired to an unintended route by mistake. . Even if a room for selection is given as described above, if it actually deviates from the player's intention, it can be a factor that reduces the game motivation. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if a plurality of balls are used as a trigger for comparison, there is room for adjusting the operation amount after visually confirming the launch destination. Thereby, a player's intention can be suitably reflected in a game result.

  Feature E3. The gaming machine according to Feature E1, wherein the first and second ball entering portions are disposed in a predetermined flow path in the game area.

  According to the feature E3, there is room for entering the second entrance when aiming at the first entrance, and entering the first entrance when aiming at the second entrance. There is room for a sphere. Since the entrance portion that expects entry and the entrance portion that does not expect entry are arranged in the same flow path, attention will be focused on both entrance and avoidance of the entrance game ball. The degree of attention to the behavior of can be improved suitably.

  Feature E4. The comparison of the number of balls entered by the comparison means is performed based on the fact that the sum of the number of balls entered into the first ball-in part and the number of balls into the second ball-in part has reached a predetermined number. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3.

  When it is desired to narrow the destination, it is assumed that attention to the movement of each game ball is likely to increase. Then, when it is desired to determine the movement of each game ball, there is a possibility that the game ball is fired carefully. Here, as shown in this feature, if the comparison is performed when the total number of balls entering the first and second balls reaches a predetermined number, the launch of the game ball is carefully performed. Therefore, the above-mentioned attention degree improving effect can be suitably exhibited. In addition, according to the configuration managed by the total number of entered balls, it is possible to prevent the game from being greatly delayed due to the room for changing the entered ball part as a target on the way.

  It may also occur when a game ball does not enter the first and second entrance parts. Even in such a case, since the comparison is avoided until the total number of balls entered reaches a predetermined number, it is possible to prevent the number of balls entering each ball club from being contrary to the player's intention. it can.

Feature E5. Comprising a number-of-launch detection means for detecting the number of game balls launched into the game area;
Any one of features E1 to E3, wherein the number of balls entered by the comparison unit is compared based on the number of game balls detected by the number-of-fires detection unit reaching a predetermined number. The gaming machine described in 1.

  When it is desired to narrow the destination, it is assumed that attention to the movement of each game ball is likely to increase. Then, when it is desired to determine the movement of each game ball, there is a possibility that the game ball is fired carefully. Here, as shown in this feature, if the comparison is performed when the total number of balls entering the first and second balls reaches a predetermined number, the launch of the game ball is carefully performed. Therefore, the above-mentioned attention degree improving effect can be suitably exhibited. In addition, according to the configuration managed by the total number of entered balls, it is possible to prevent the game from being greatly delayed due to the room for changing the entered ball part as a target on the way.

  Feature E6. In the predetermined state, there is provided an informing means for informing information corresponding to the number of balls entered into the first ball-in part and the number of balls into the second ball-in part. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5.

  As shown in the feature E1, etc., in the configuration in which the game process is affected by the number of entered balls, it is caused by a misunderstanding between the stored number of entered balls and the number of entered balls detected by the player. It is feared that the development of the game after that changes due to the deviation. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the occurrence of such inconveniences can be suitably suppressed by adopting a configuration that teaches the number of balls entered into each ball entry section.

Feature E7. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) for launching a game ball to the game area with a launch intensity corresponding to a launch operation by a player;
A starting ball entering part (acting ball entering parts 62, 63) provided in the game area (game area PE);
Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the entrance to the starting entrance part;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 604b provided in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Determination for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, information related to winning, information related to high-frequency support mode, information related to reach display) Means (for example, a function of executing the determination processing in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
When the determination result by the determination means is a corresponding result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, the game state is set to a preparation state (for example, a preparation mode) before shifting to a special game state (for example, an opening / closing execution mode). 1 transition means (function of executing transition processing to the opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
A first entrance part (for example, the left through gate 66L and the left general winning opening 61L) and a second entrance part (for example, the right through gate 66R and the right general winning opening 61R) that are provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter. )When,
First storage means (for example, a function for storing the number of winnings in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) for storing the number of entering the first entering portion;
Second storage means (for example, a function for storing the number of winnings in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) for storing the number of entering the second pitching unit;
When a predetermined comparison condition is satisfied, the number of entrances to the first entrance part stored by the first storage unit and the entrance to the second entrance part stored by the second storage unit A comparison means for comparing numbers (for example, a comparison function in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
A game process execution means (for example, a function for determining the number of rounds in the MPU of the main control device 162) for executing a predetermined game process based on the comparison result by the comparison means;
When the sum of the number of balls entered into the first ball-in part and the number of balls into the second ball-in part in the preparation state reaches a predetermined number, the game state is changed from the preparation state to the special game state. A second transition means (function for executing a transition process to the preparation mode in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the second transition means shifts to the special gaming state, the type of the special gaming state to be shifted is determined based on the comparison result.

  Based on the fact that the sum of the number of balls entered into the first and second balls in the preparation state has reached a predetermined number, the special game state is entered. At this time, the comparison result of the number of balls entered into the first and second pitching parts influences the type of special gaming state that becomes the transition destination. If, for example, the advantage of the special game state changes according to the result of the game in the preparation state, monotonization of the game in the preparation state can be suitably suppressed. In addition, in the configuration in which the transition destination is changed by comparing the number of balls entered into the first and second balls, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming excessively complicated due to the suppression of monotonization.

<Feature F group> When compared in the same storage area, the probability difference between direct and shift features F1. A starting entrance (right operation port 85) provided in the game area (game area PE);
Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the entrance to the starting entrance part;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 604b provided in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) capable of storing a plurality (for example, four) of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a function for executing the determination processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162); ,
Game state transition for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state (a gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode) when the determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information (for example, a 4R special hit result). Means (function of executing the game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
Information corresponding to the determination result in a case where the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage unit is a determination target by the determination unit, the information before the predetermined special information is the target of the determination Destination specifying means for specifying at timing (function to execute the hold command setting process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
The special notification based on the information specified by the destination specifying means is performed at a specific game time before the game times related to the special information specified by the destination specifying means, or the specific game times and the specific game times. Special notification means (a function of executing a notice effect in the MPU 612 of the notification / effect control device 610) performed in the previous game round,
The acquired information storage means has a plurality of storage areas (execution areas and first area to eighth area) for storing the special information individually.
Shift means for sequentially shifting the special information stored in the storage area in the plurality of storage areas (holding information shift function);
Based on the fact that the newly acquired special information is stored in any of the plurality of storage areas, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to perform the special notification on the special information, and the special information already stored is shifted. Special notice lottery means for performing lottery of whether or not to perform the special notice on the special information shifted based on the fact that it has been shifted by the means (whether or not the notice effect is executed in the MPU 612 of the notice / effect control device 610) A lottery function)
The special notification lottery means is already stored than the lottery for determining whether or not to perform the special notification on the special information based on the newly acquired special information stored in any of the plurality of storage areas. Based on the fact that the special information is shifted by the shift means, the lottery of whether or not to perform the special notification on the shifted special information is more likely to be a lottery result corresponding to the execution of the special notification. A gaming machine having set means (a function for performing lottery with reference to a normal table and a special table in the MPU 612 of the notification / production control device 610).

  According to the feature F1, a special notification is triggered when newly acquired special information is added to the acquired information storage means (storage area), or when special information already stored is digested and the special information is shifted. Is executed. In this manner, diversifying the execution trigger of the special notification is preferable for suppressing monotonization of the game. A difference is provided so that special notification is easier to be executed when special information is shifted than when special information is newly added. By making it easier to execute special notification when a shift occurs, it is possible to suppress a significant decrease in the opportunity for execution of special notification even when the game proceeds without adding special information.

  Here, if it is configured to increase the chance of occurrence of special notification in the process of reducing the stored special information, it is possible to urge the player who is about to end the game to expect the special gaming state. . Thereby, continuation of a game can be accelerated | stimulated and it can contribute to the improvement of the operating rate of a game machine. Moreover, since the difference is provided so that the chance of occurrence of the special notification is reduced when the special information is added, it is possible to make it difficult to give the player an annoying impression that the special notification occurs frequently.

Feature F2. A starting entrance (right operation port 85) provided in the game area (game area PE);
Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the entrance to the starting entrance part;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 604b provided in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) capable of storing a plurality (for example, four) of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a function for executing the determination processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162); ,
Game state transition for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state (a gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode) when the determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information (for example, a 4R special hit result). Means (function of executing the game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
Information corresponding to the determination result in a case where the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage unit is a determination target by the determination unit, the information before the predetermined special information is the target of the determination Destination specifying means for specifying at timing (function to execute the hold command setting process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
The special notification based on the information specified by the destination specifying means is performed at a specific game time before the game times related to the special information specified by the destination specifying means, or the specific game times and the specific game times. Special notification means (a function of executing a notice effect in the MPU 612 of the notification / effect control device 610) performed in the previous game round,
The acquired information storage means has a plurality of storage areas (execution areas and first area to eighth area) for storing the special information individually.
Shift means for sequentially shifting the special information stored in the storage area in the plurality of storage areas (holding information shift function);
Based on the fact that the newly acquired special information is stored in any of the plurality of storage areas, it is determined whether or not to perform the special notification for the special information, and the special information already stored is the shift means The special notification determining means for determining whether or not to perform the special notification on the special information shifted based on the fact that the information is shifted by (the lottery of whether or not to execute the notice effect in the MPU 612 of the notification / effect control device 610) Function to perform)
The special notification determining means is more effective when the previously stored special information is shifted by the shift means than when the newly acquired special information is stored in any of the plurality of storage areas. A gaming machine configured to facilitate the special notification.

  According to the feature F2, a special notification is triggered when newly acquired special information is added to the acquired information storage means (storage area), or when special information already stored is digested and the special information is shifted. Is executed. In this manner, diversifying the execution trigger of the special notification is preferable for suppressing monotonization of the game. A difference is provided so that special notification is easier to be executed when special information is shifted than when special information is newly added. By making it easier to execute special notification when a shift occurs, it is possible to suppress a significant decrease in the opportunity for execution of special notification even when the game proceeds without adding special information.

  Here, if it is configured to increase the chance of occurrence of special notification in the process of reducing the stored special information, it is possible to urge the player who is about to end the game to expect the special gaming state. . Thereby, continuation of a game can be accelerated | stimulated and it can contribute to the improvement of the operating rate of a game machine. Moreover, since the difference is provided so that the chance of occurrence of the special notification is reduced when the special information is added, it is possible to make it difficult to give the player an annoying impression that the special notification occurs frequently.

Feature F3. A starting entrance (right operation port 85) provided in the game area (game area PE);
Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the entrance to the starting entrance part;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 604b provided in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) capable of storing a plurality (for example, four) of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a function for executing the determination processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162); ,
Game state transition for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state (a gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode) when the determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information (for example, a 4R special hit result). Means (function of executing the game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
Information corresponding to the determination result in a case where the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage unit is a determination target by the determination unit, the information before the predetermined special information is the target of the determination Destination specifying means for specifying at timing (function to execute the hold command setting process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
The special notification based on the information specified by the destination specifying means is performed at a specific game time before the game times related to the special information specified by the destination specifying means, or the specific game times and the specific game times. Special notification means (a function for executing a special notice effect in the MPU 612 of the notification / production control device 610) that is performed in the previous game round,
The acquired information storage means has a plurality of storage areas (execution areas and first area to eighth area) for storing the special information individually.
Shift means for sequentially shifting the special information stored in the storage area in the plurality of storage areas (holding information shift function);
Based on the fact that the newly acquired special information is stored in any of the plurality of storage areas, it is determined whether or not to perform the special notification for the special information, and the special information already stored is the shift means The special notification determining means for determining whether or not to perform the special notification on the special information shifted based on the fact that the information is shifted by (the lottery of whether or not to execute the notice effect in the MPU 612 of the notification / effect control device 610) Function to perform)
The special notification determining unit is configured to shift the special information that is already stored, as compared with the case where the newly acquired special information is stored in a predetermined storage area (for example, the first area) among the plurality of storage areas. When it is shifted by means and moved to the predetermined storage area, it is configured to determine whether or not to perform special notification so that the special notification is easily performed. To play.

  According to feature F3, a special notification is triggered when newly acquired special information is added to the acquired information storage means (storage area) or when special information already stored is digested and the special information is shifted. Is executed. In this manner, diversifying the execution trigger of the special notification is preferable for suppressing monotonization of the game. A difference is provided so that special notification is easier to be executed when special information is shifted than when special information is newly added. By making it easier to execute special notification when a shift occurs, it is possible to suppress a significant decrease in the opportunity for execution of special notification even when the game proceeds without adding special information.

  Here, when the player finishes the game, the launch of the game ball is often stopped with the special information remaining. Then, after seeing the determination result of the stored special information, it is carried away. Here, as shown in this feature, when special information is stored in a predetermined storage area, the special information may be triggered by the acquisition of new special information, It can be broadly divided into those moved from the storage area. In consideration of the flow at the end, when the special information is moved to a predetermined storage area due to the shift, special notification is more likely to occur than when special information is newly added. In other words, special notification is likely to occur when the user is watching for digestion of special information before leaving. Thereby, it is possible to give the player an expectation that any of the existing special information may be an opportunity to shift to the special gaming state. Since this can be an opportunity to promote continuation of the game, it can contribute to an improvement in the operating rate of the game machine.

  On the other hand, in the process in which the number of special information acquired one after another and accumulated in the storage area is increased, the probability of occurrence of special notification is lower than that in the decrease process described above. In the increase process, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the special notification, which is a factor that gives an impression that the special notification is troublesome to the player.

  Feature F4. The special notification determining means is shifted by the shift means to the predetermined storage rather than the case where special information that follows is stored in the special information shifted by the shift means and moved to the predetermined storage area. The gaming machine according to F3, wherein the special notification is more easily performed when the special information that follows the special information that has moved to the area is not stored.

  According to the feature F4, when the subsequent special information is not stored, that is, when the special information moved to the predetermined storage area by the shift is the last (latest) special information, the special notification is easily performed. By this, it is possible to urge the player who is going to leave his seat to expect the last special information. In such a case, it is possible to prepare for the launch of a game ball in preparation for the transition to the special game state, or to expect that the state (state) of the game machine may be good. Thereby, it is possible to promote the continuation of the game and contribute to the improvement of the operating rate of the gaming machine.

  Feature F5. The special notification determining means is configured such that the special notification is more easily executed as the special information following the special information shifted by the shift means and moved to the predetermined storage area is smaller. The gaming machine according to Feature F3.

  As shown in the feature F3 and the like, in the case where the continuation of the game is promoted by generating a special notification, the reliability of the special notification itself is lowered by frequently exhibiting such a function. . Therefore, when deciding whether or not to perform special notification for special information that has moved to a predetermined storage area, it is easier to perform special notification as the number of subsequent special information decreases. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of special notifications and to suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience.

Feature F6. Game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) for launching a game ball to the game area based on a player's launch operation;
The special notification determining means shifts the already stored special information by the shift means to the predetermined storage area, compared to the case where the newly acquired special information is stored in the predetermined storage area. The special notification means (function to perform a lottery of the hold notice effect with reference to a special table) for determining whether or not to perform the special notification so that the special notification is more easily executed. ,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F5, further comprising a restriction unit that regulates the determination of the special notification by the special determination unit when the launch operation is performed. .

  As described above, in the configuration that promotes the continuation of the game by the special notification, if the special notification occurs frequently under the situation where the player does not intend to end the game, the reliability of the special notification is reduced. . In this way, when the reliability of the special notification itself is lowered, there is a concern that the effect of prompting the continuation of the game by the special notification will not be exhibited well.

  Here, when the player ends the game, the launch of the game ball is often stopped with the special information remaining, and he leaves the seat after seeing the determination result of the stored special information. Easy to carry. In this feature, in view of such circumstances, when the operation of launching a game ball is not performed, a special notification is made darkly by adopting a configuration that regulates the special notification preferential treatment triggered by the shift. It is possible to prevent an increase in the chance of occurrence. Thereby, it is possible to suitably exhibit the effect of prompting the continuation of the game by special notification.

  It should be noted that “a restricting means for restricting the determination of special notification by the special determining means when the firing operation is performed” shown in this feature is referred to as “a game ball is fired by the game ball firing means. In this case, it is possible to use a restricting means for restricting the determination of the special notification by the special determining means.

Feature F7. The starting pitching portion is a variable pitching portion that can be switched between an accepting state (open state) in which a starting ball can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the entering is impossible. Yes,
Switching means (function to execute support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the starting pitching portion between the accepting state and the non-accepting state;
As a switching mode of the starting entrance part by the switching means, a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and a second switching mode in which entering the starting entrance part is more likely to occur than the first switching mode ( High frequency support mode),
The special notification determining unit is configured to shift the special information that is already stored, as compared with the case where the newly acquired special information is stored in a predetermined storage area (for example, the first area) among the plurality of storage areas. Special decision means (refer to the special table) for determining whether or not to perform special notification so that the special notification is easier to be executed when shifted to the predetermined storage area. A lottery function for holding advance notice)
Any of the features F3 to F6, further comprising a restricting means for restricting the determination of the special notification by the special determining means when the switching manner by the switching means is the second switching aspect. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  As described above, in the configuration that promotes the continuation of the game by the special notification, if the special notification occurs frequently under the situation where the player does not intend to end the game, the reliability of the special notification is reduced. . In this way, when the reliability of the special notification itself is lowered, there is a concern that the effect of prompting the continuation of the game by the special notification will not be exhibited well.

  Here, when the switching mode of the switching means is the second switching mode, it is self-evident that the player is in a state advantageous to the player from the movement of the starting ball entering portion. Therefore, it is assumed that there are few opportunities for the game to end in such a situation. Under such circumstances, a practically preferable configuration can be realized by restricting the preferential treatment of special notification.

Feature F8. The special notification determining means is configured so that the special information that has already been stored is received by the shift means rather than the case where the newly acquired special information is stored in the predetermined storage area (for example, the first area to the fourth area). Special determination means for determining whether or not to perform the special notification so that the special notification is more easily performed when shifted to the predetermined storage area,
When the special determination unit determines whether to perform special notification triggered by the shift by the shift unit, the number of special information stored prior to the special information to be determined is small. The gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F7, characterized in that the probability that the special notification is executed increases.

  As exemplified in the feature F3, the special information often continues to decrease (shift) when the game ends. On the other hand, in a situation where the game is continuously performed, it is assumed that the number of stored special information is secured to some extent because the special information is repeatedly reduced or increased. Therefore, in the process in which the number of special information decreases following the shift, it is preferable to increase the probability of occurrence of special notifications according to the decrease in special information, thereby promoting the continuation of the game using special notifications. Can be demonstrated.

  In addition, it is also possible to employ a configuration in which the probability that the special notification is executed increases as the number of consecutive shifts increases.

Feature F9. The special notification determining unit is configured to shift the special information that is already stored, as compared with the case where the newly acquired special information is stored in a predetermined storage area (for example, the first area) among the plurality of storage areas. Special determination means for determining whether or not to perform special notification so that the special notification is more easily executed when the shift to the predetermined storage area is performed by the means,
When the special information is shifted by the shift unit and moved to the predetermined storage area, the special determination unit is configured to increase the number of shifts in the process of moving to the predetermined storage area and thereby notify the special notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F8, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be easily executed.

  As exemplified in the feature F3, the special information often continues to decrease (shift) when the game ends. On the other hand, in a situation where the game is continuously performed, the number of special information stored at a time decreases because the special information repeatedly decreases or increases. Therefore, in the process where the number of special information decreases following the shift, the special notification is used to promote the continuation of the game by increasing the probability of occurrence of the special notification according to the number of times the shift has occurred continuously. The effect that can be demonstrated suitably.

Feature F10. The special notification determining means includes
When the newly acquired special information is stored in a predetermined storage area (for example, the first area) of the plurality of storage areas, the special information that has already been stored is shifted by the shift means, and the predetermined information is stored. Normal decision means for deciding whether or not to perform special notification so that the probability that the special notification is executed is the same when the storage area is moved to (if the lottery for the holding notice effect is drawn with reference to the normal table) Function to perform) and
The case where the special information already stored is shifted by the shift means and moved to the predetermined storage area is more than the case where the newly acquired special information is stored in the predetermined storage area. Special decision means (a function for drawing a lottery of a hold notice effect with reference to a special table) for deciding whether or not to make a special notice so that the special notice is easily executed;
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F9, further comprising: a unit that switches between the normal determination unit and the special determination unit according to a game situation. .

  As shown in the feature F10, the effect shown in the feature A1 or the like can be suitably exhibited by adopting a configuration in which the means used according to the game situation is switched between the normal decision means and the special decision means.

Feature F11. A starting entrance (right operation port 85) provided in the game area (game area PE);
Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the entrance to the starting entrance part;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 604b provided in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) capable of storing a plurality (for example, four) of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a function for executing the determination processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162); ,
Game state transition for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state (a gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode) when the determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information (for example, a 4R special hit result). Means (function of executing the game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
Information corresponding to the determination result in a case where the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage unit is a determination target by the determination unit, the information before the predetermined special information is the target of the determination Destination specifying means for specifying at timing (function to execute the hold command setting process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
The special notification based on the information specified by the destination specifying means is performed at a specific game time before the game times related to the special information specified by the destination specifying means, or the specific game times and the specific game times. Special notification means (a function of executing a notice effect in the MPU 612 of the notification / effect control device 610) performed in the previous game round,
The acquired information storage means has a plurality of storage areas (execution areas and first area to eighth area) for storing the special information individually.
Shift means for sequentially shifting the special information stored in the storage area in the plurality of storage areas (holding information shift function);
Based on the fact that the newly acquired special information is stored in any of the plurality of storage areas, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to perform the special notification on the special information, and the special information already stored is shifted. Special notice lottery means for performing lottery of whether or not to perform the special notice on the special information shifted based on the fact that it has been shifted by the means (whether or not the notice effect is executed in the MPU 612 of the notice / effect control device 610) A lottery function)
The special notification lottery means includes a case where a lottery for determining whether or not to perform the special notification on the special information is performed based on newly acquired special information stored in any of the storage areas. When the special information that is already stored is shifted by the shift means, and when the lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform the special notification on the shifted special information, the special notification is executed. A gaming machine that is set so that the probabilities of corresponding lottery results are different.

  According to the feature F10, special notification is triggered when newly acquired special information is added to the acquired information storage means (storage area), or when special information already stored is digested and the special information is shifted. Is executed. In this manner, diversifying the execution trigger of the special notification is preferable for suppressing monotonization of the game. By changing the probability that special notification is executed when special information is newly added and when special information is shifted, it is possible to suitably diversify the generation mode of special notification.

<Characteristic G group> Change in activation probability of pre-reading effect depending on the number of preceding / following reservations. Feature G1. A starting entrance (right operation port 85) provided in the game area (game area PE);
Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the entrance to the starting entrance part;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 604b provided in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) capable of storing a plurality (for example, four) of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a function for executing the determination processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162); ,
Game state transition for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state (a gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode) when the determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information (for example, a 4R special hit result). Means (function of executing the game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
Information corresponding to the determination result in a case where the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage unit is a determination target by the determination unit, the information before the predetermined special information is the target of the determination Destination specifying means for specifying at timing (function to execute the hold command setting process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
The special notification based on the information specified by the destination specifying means is performed at a specific game time before the game times related to the special information specified by the destination specifying means, or the specific game times and the specific game times. Special notification means (function of executing a notice effect in the MPU 612 of the notification / effect control device 610) performed in the previous game round,
Special notification determining means for determining whether or not to perform the special notification (a function for performing a lottery on whether or not to perform a notice effect in the MPU 612 of the notification / effect control device 610);
The gaming machine characterized in that the special notification determining means has a configuration in which the establishment probability that the execution condition of the special notification is satisfied changes according to the number of special information stored in advance.

  According to the feature G1, when determining whether or not to perform special notification, the execution condition changes depending on the number of special information stored prior to the corresponding special information. Thus, if the probability that the special notification is executed is changed due to the influence of the number of preceding special information, the generation mode of the special notification can be suitably diversified. This is preferable in order to suppress the monotonization of the game and improve the degree of attention to the game.

  Feature G2. The special notification determining unit is configured such that the probability that the execution condition of the special notification is satisfied increases as the number of special information stored in advance decreases. Game machines.

  In a game of a type in which a plurality of special information can be stored, the number of stored special information decreases at a stretch by continuing a period in which special information is not acquired even though a game ball is being fired. There is concern that this may be a factor that gives the player the impression that the game is not being advanced efficiently. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, special notification is likely to occur in such a situation. Occurrence of the inconvenience can be suppressed by encouraging the player's attention to be directed to the special notification. In particular, since special notification can be performed in parallel with the progress of the main game (variable display of symbols, etc.), even if the probability of occurrence of special notification increases, it may cause the game to be delayed. Can be avoided.

  Feature G3. The game according to Feature G1 or Feature G2, wherein the special notification determination unit is configured such that the smaller the number of subsequent special information, the higher the probability that the execution condition of the special notification is satisfied. Machine.

  According to the feature G3, when there is a lot of subsequent special information, it is easy to generate a special notification triggered by the subsequent hold information. That is, by making it easy to entrust special notification to the subsequent hold information, it is not necessary to forcibly execute the special notification with the preceding special information. Thereby, the improvement effect of the attention degree mentioned above can be exhibited suitably.

Feature G4. A starting entrance (right operation port 85) provided in the game area (game area PE);
Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the entrance to the starting entrance part;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 604b provided in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) capable of storing a plurality (for example, four) of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a function for executing the determination processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162); ,
Game state transition for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state (a gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode) when the determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information (for example, a 4R special hit result). Means (function of executing the game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
Information corresponding to the determination result in a case where the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage unit is a determination target by the determination unit, the information before the predetermined special information is the target of the determination Destination specifying means for specifying at timing (function to execute the hold command setting process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
The special notification based on the information specified by the destination specifying means is performed at a specific game time before the game times related to the special information specified by the destination specifying means, or the specific game times and the specific game times. Special notification means (function to execute a notice effect in the MPU 612 of the notification / effect control device 610) performed in the previous game round,
The acquired information storage means has a plurality of storage areas (execution areas and first area to eighth area) for storing the special information individually.
Shift means for sequentially shifting the special information stored in the storage area in the plurality of storage areas (holding information shift function);
Special notification determining means (in MPU 612 of notification / effect control device 610) for determining whether or not to perform the special notification on the special information shifted based on the fact that the special information already stored is shifted by the shift means. And a lottery to determine whether or not to perform the notice effect)
The gaming machine is characterized in that the special notification determining means is configured such that the probability that the execution condition of the special notification is satisfied is higher when the number of special information stored in advance is smaller.

  According to the feature G4, special notification is executed when the already stored special information is digested and the special information is shifted. Here, when the player finishes the game, the launch of the game ball is often stopped with the special information remaining. Then, after seeing the determination result of the stored special information, it is carried away. As shown in this feature, when special information is stored in a predetermined storage area, the special information may be triggered by the acquisition of new special information, or from another storage area by a shift. Broadly divided into things that have moved. In consideration of the flow at the end, when the special information is moved to a predetermined storage area due to the shift, special notification is more likely to occur than when special information is newly added. In other words, special notification is likely to occur when the user is watching for digestion of special information before leaving. Thereby, it is possible to give the player an expectation that any of the existing special information may be an opportunity to shift to the special gaming state. Since this can be an opportunity to promote continuation of the game, it can contribute to an improvement in the operating rate of the game machine.

  Further, the function for prompting continuation is more easily demonstrated as the number of special information stored in advance decreases. That is, when the special information continues to decrease, special notification is likely to occur as the number decreases. In other words, in the process in which the number of special information acquired one after another and accumulated in the storage area increases, the probability of occurrence of special notification is lower than that in the decrease process described above. In the increase process, the special notification is frequently generated during the game, for example, by deviating from the tendency of the special process to be generated easily by reducing the process of suppressing the occurrence of the special notification. It can suppress that it becomes a factor which gives the player an annoying impression.

<Characteristic H group> Derivation of F group Characteristic H1. A starting entrance (right operation port 85) provided in the game area (game area PE);
Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the entrance to the starting entrance part;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 604b provided in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) capable of storing a plurality (for example, four) of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a function for executing the determination processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162); ,
Game state transition for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state (a gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode) when the determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information (for example, a 4R special hit result). Means (function of executing the game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
Suggestion effect execution means for executing an effect that suggests whether or not the special information corresponds to the predetermined determination information (for example, a function of executing a hold notice effect in the MPU 612 of the notification / effect control device 610);
Suggesting effect determining means for determining whether or not to execute the suggesting effect (for example, a function for determining whether or not the holding notice effect is performed in the MPU 612 of the notification and effect control device 610);
The suggestion effect determining means is configured such that the suggestion effect is more easily executed as the number of special information previously stored in the acquired information storage means is smaller.

  In a game of a type in which a plurality of special information can be stored, the number of stored special information decreases at a stretch by continuing a period in which special information is not acquired even though a game ball is being fired. There is concern that this may be a factor that gives the player the impression that the game is not being advanced efficiently. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, the suggestive effect is likely to occur in such a situation. The occurrence of the inconvenience can be suppressed by encouraging the player's attention to be directed to the suggestion effect.

  In addition, it is preferable to set it as the structure which can be performed in parallel with the progress of the main game (variable display of a symbol etc.) about the said suggestion effect. According to such a configuration, even if the probability of occurrence of the special notification becomes high, it can be suitably avoided that it becomes a factor that delays the game.

Feature H2. A starting entrance (right operation port 85) provided in the game area (game area PE);
Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the entrance to the starting entrance part;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 604b provided in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) capable of storing a plurality (for example, four) of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in a predetermined storage area corresponds to the predetermined determination information (for example, the main control device 162). The function of executing the determination processing in the MPU 602), and
Game state transition for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state (a gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode) when the determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information (for example, a 4R special hit result). Means (function to execute the game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162),
The acquired information storage means has a plurality of storage areas (execution areas and first area to eighth area) for storing the special information individually.
Shift means for sequentially shifting the special information stored in the storage area to the predetermined storage area in the plurality of storage areas (holding information shift function);
Suggestion effect execution means for executing a predetermined suggestion effect that suggests whether or not the special information corresponds to the predetermined determination information (for example, a function of executing a hold notice effect in the MPU 612 of the notification / effect control device 610) When,
Suggesting effect determining means for determining whether or not to execute the predetermined suggestive effect (for example, a function for determining whether or not to hold a reserved notice effect in the MPU 612 of the notification / effect control device 610);
The suggestion effect determination means shifts the special information already stored by the shift means to the predetermined storage area, compared to when the newly acquired special information is stored in the predetermined storage area. The gaming machine is configured to determine whether or not to perform the predetermined suggestion effect so that the predetermined suggestion effect is more easily executed.

  The suggestion effect is executed when the newly acquired special information is added to the acquired information storage means (storage area) or when the already stored special information is digested and the special information is shifted. As described above, diversifying the execution timing of the suggestion effect is preferable in order to suppress monotonization of the game. In particular, a difference is provided so that the suggestive effect is more easily executed when the special information shift occurs than when the special information is newly added. When the suggestion effect is easily executed when the shift occurs, it is possible to prevent the opportunity for executing the special notification from greatly decreasing even when the game proceeds without adding the special information.

Feature H3. A starting entrance (right operation port 85) provided in the game area (game area PE);
Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the entrance to the starting entrance part;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 604b provided in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) capable of storing a plurality (for example, four) of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in a predetermined storage area corresponds to the predetermined determination information (for example, the main control device 162). The function of executing the determination processing in the MPU 602), and
Game state transition for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state (a gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode) when the determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information (for example, a 4R special hit result). Means (function to execute the game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162),
The acquired information storage means has a plurality of storage areas (execution areas and first area to eighth area) for storing the special information individually.
Shift means for sequentially shifting the special information stored in the storage area to the predetermined storage area in the plurality of storage areas (holding information shift function);
Suggestion effect execution means for executing a predetermined suggestion effect that suggests whether or not the special information corresponds to the predetermined determination information (for example, a function of executing a hold notice effect in the MPU 612 of the notification / effect control device 610) When,
Suggesting effect determining means for determining whether or not to execute the predetermined suggestive effect (for example, a function for determining whether or not to hold a reserved notice effect in the MPU 612 of the notification / effect control device 610);
As the predetermined suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect and a second suggestion effect that is more easily selected when shifting to the special game state than the first suggestion effect are provided,
The suggestion effect determination means shifts the special information already stored by the shift means to the predetermined storage area, compared to when the newly acquired special information is stored in the predetermined storage area. The gaming machine is configured to determine whether or not to perform the second suggestion effect so that the second suggestion effect is more easily executed.

  In a game of a type in which a plurality of special information can be stored, the number of stored special information decreases at a stretch by continuing a period in which special information is not acquired even though a game ball is being fired. There is concern that this may be a factor that gives the player the impression that the game is not being advanced efficiently. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, a suggestive effect is likely to occur in a situation where the shift continues. The occurrence of the inconvenience can be suppressed by encouraging the player's attention to be directed to the suggestion effect.

  In order to exert such an effect, it is preferable that the suggestion effect itself attracts the player's attention. Therefore, when the suggestion effect is executed with the shift as an opportunity, the expectation for the transition to the special gaming state is relatively higher than when the suggestion effect is executed when the special information is simply acquired. By making it easier to select the second suggestion effect that is not present, the above-described effects can be suitably exhibited.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko machine: operation means (game ball launching handle 41) operated by a player, game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, and the fired A ball passage (guide rail 100) for guiding a game ball to a predetermined game area, and each game component (such as a nail 69) disposed in the game area (game area PE); A gaming machine that gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a passing portion (general winning opening 61 or the like).

  Slot machine, etc .: A variable display means that displays a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then stops and displays the symbol sequence. Special game advantageous to the player on the condition that the change of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stoppage or when a predetermined time elapses and the final stop symbol at the time of stoppage is a specific symbol A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

  Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with variable display means that displays the symbol sequence consisting of multiple symbols in a variably displayed state, and then stops and displays the symbol sequence. The special game state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the change of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operating means or when the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol A throwing device that performs a throwing process for taking a game ball from the ball tray and a payout device for paying out the game ball to the ball tray, A gaming machine configured such that the operation of the starting operation means is made effective when a game ball is inserted by.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine as a gaming machine, 60 ... Game board, 61 ... General prize opening, 62 ... Upper action entry part, 63 ... Lower action entry part, 64 ... Lower variable prize device, 65 ... Right variable prize Device: 66 ... Through gate, 75 ... Symbol display device, 75a ... Display screen, 162 ... Main control device, 602 ... MPU, 610 ... Notification / production control device, 612 ... MPU, PE ... Game area.

Claims (5)

A starting pitching section provided in the game area;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the entrance to the starting entrance part;
Acquisition information storage means capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information;
Gaming state transition means for transitioning the gaming state to the special gaming state when the determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information;
Information corresponding to the determination result in a case where the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage unit is a determination target by the determination unit, the information before the predetermined special information is the target of the determination A destination identification means to identify in timing;
The special notification based on the information specified by the destination specifying means is performed at a specific game time before the game times related to the special information specified by the destination specifying means, or the specific game times and the specific game times. Special notification means to be performed in the previous game times before,
The acquired information storage means has a plurality of storage areas for individually storing the special information,
Shift means for sequentially shifting the special information stored in the storage area in the plurality of storage areas;
Based on the fact that the newly acquired special information is stored in any of the plurality of storage areas, it is determined whether or not to perform the special notification for the special information, and the special information already stored is the shift means Special notification determining means for determining whether to perform the special notification on the special information shifted based on being shifted by
The special notification determining means is configured such that the special information that is already stored is shifted by the shift means and the special information that has been newly acquired is stored in a predetermined storage area of the plurality of storage areas. A gaming machine configured to make a determination as to whether or not to perform special notification so that the special notification is more easily executed when the user moves to a predetermined storage area.   The special notification determining means is shifted by the shift means to the predetermined storage rather than the case where special information that follows is stored in the special information shifted by the shift means and moved to the predetermined storage area. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the special notification is more easily executed when the special information that follows the special information that has moved to the area is not stored. Game ball launching means for launching a game ball to the game area based on a player's launch operation;
The special notification determining means shifts the already stored special information by the shift means to the predetermined storage area, compared to the case where the newly acquired special information is stored in the predetermined storage area. If there is a special determination means for determining whether to perform special notification so that the special notification is more easily performed,
3. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a restricting unit that restricts the determination of the special notification by the special determining unit when the launching operation is performed. The starting entrance part is a variable entrance part that can be switched between an accepting state in which entrance to the starting entrance part is possible and a non-accepting state in which entering is impossible,
Comprising a switching means for switching the starting pitching part to the receiving state and the non-receiving state,
As the switching mode of the starting ball entering portion by the switching means, a first switching mode and a second switching mode in which entering the starting ball portion is more likely to occur than the first switching mode are provided,
The special notification determining means is configured such that the special information that is already stored is shifted by the shift means and the special information that has been newly acquired is stored in a predetermined storage area of the plurality of storage areas. Special decision means for deciding whether or not to perform special notification so that the special notification is more easily executed when moving to a predetermined storage area,
4. The apparatus according to claim 1, further comprising a restricting unit that restricts the determination of the special notification by the special determination unit when the switching mode by the switching unit is the second switching mode. The gaming machine according to any one of the above. The special notification determining means shifts the already stored special information by the shift means to the predetermined storage area, compared to the case where the newly acquired special information is stored in the predetermined storage area. If there is a special determination means for determining whether to perform the special notification so that the special notification is more easily performed,
When the special determination unit determines whether to perform special notification triggered by the shift by the shift unit, the number of special information stored prior to the special information to be determined is small. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the gaming machine is configured such that the probability that the special notification is executed increases.

Images